Home

Oracle AutoVue 20.0.0 User`s Manual

1. 194 Configuring Background Colors for Desktop 194 Markus iecit a rasis wd d dac bd aun FREE 197 Markup Navigation 198 Filtering MarK pS bane 199 Working with Markup Figs 200 Saved States aca po a Mox HON Meta iut M NM A uA 200 Creating a IIE cimi Geeta nina har of RR AEE eE ENT 201 Entering Markup Information oec sio DR Re RIO Aude pen ierra RU RS 201 Saving a New 202 Opening Markup POR Ptr dU WO cut da EO E 202 Saving an Existing Markup 203 Importing a Mabkulp Flle 203 Exportingia Markup dd hs edens Ea P RO RA ERU t REN odds 204 Setting the Active Markup 205 Changing the Active Markup 205 W
2. ema gr true ato pg a tin Ep 252 Markup Entities uoce aeri ra dd dU cR Pad rr p nre un od 252 Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities eese eere tentent tete 253 Aceite TX RR Oti UK LEER ERRAT RUN RAS ENS OMNE 261 Addita INOLB ee ot 263 Nesting Entities asi ean ete cans a a p Rd OR E li ad Rao AR n 263 Working with Markup Entities eese eene restet tonta tnt tentent 264 Go Mark p Entity m 264 Selecting Markup Entities oae deese xU OX PU UO qe uta ra toUit tet 264 Moving a Markup Ent Eoo ss cast udo tele du tote tei pate toe o pe ee 265 Transforming Markup Entitis eoo or REN REO d da pcd tst en me 265 Rotating all Markup Entities eati itp neve pire br eei e Er rtg 265 Rotating a selected Markup Entity 265 Flipping all Markup Entities 266 Hiding All Entities sr EE ET ESS 266 Hiding Markup Files n GRO petat Tuae E RRR RS 266 Grouping and Ungrouping Markup Entities ssssssssssseesessecssssscsssssscssessecsesessessssecsneesesses 266 Deleting Markup Entities secto remi dre tH D RE a E
3. ee e esee teet ttettnn tnn ttn tts tnntenouns 159 Performing an Advanced 3D 5 161 Saving Search Results ceu ded ra etg dna ea ten pe i ciu dg dip dre ee 162 Measuriridg T0 acc peti ad to dr a XO UR OR a DONOR ERU aM drip ipid cas 162 3D SnappingiMOdesas eda ou err Rd ee b eb RR ER 163 Measuring DIStANGe ecoute irte betae pee cpu oce te peo e eb nae e equo abeo eniti aiai ions 164 Califorating DIS ari Ge cas d exci od tuae datu ud GERM RR GU 166 Measuring Minimultm DIStariCe 2 cerea 167 Measurmna an 168 Me suring 168 Calibrating hm dur depu IR AIRES 169 Measuring Vertex Coordinates cscsscsessscssssssssssssecssssssssnssncssssssssuscasssusesccasssscesssacsnseaceassescenseaneess 169 Measuring the Length of an Edge e eese eren tenens tentes ttt nsns 170 Measuring Face Surface cx M NOE Nep pa ted fca utu Ramune 171 Mallet BEI cient eerie tdm Erw ep risa se ret voted otn dU ERE 172 Walkthrough Dialog sesion dioe ERI oae a ed eue be a ESO iss 173 Walking Through a 3D Model eee eese teen tnn tentes tentent tontos testes test stia
4. 173 Adding Markups in Walkthrough 174 Configuring AULOVU aoo Can qe prm a registi Fg LU ved pee EUREN 177 General DEDE Gasse bis vadam ae ONE UN SEEN ente ONERE DH vetera RERO HERE 178 Configuring Options TOF CAD Files citatio tend na ten o eile a DG Rr 178 Raster 6 E EE ait 179 RUD BR REN RD eR aoe 179 RESO UINGES eoe Sette tno iR 180 I NEN REN pM 180 Measurement onore voie pir testa digi dra ORO RUNE WE UR Ete RH piri 181 Configuring the Base Font for Text Files 182 Configuring AutoVue for 2D Files eese cte eene uten e ERR 183 Shap Settiids u o io a iced E DEN US ete ila DRE Cie e nilo o EE Et UO RED aie 183 Overlays Extents SettilTtis einen appe i 183 GON GUE NR RT TIO RN 183 Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files eese nente teet tents tentis tnn 184 Renderi G icona paier a c d IRA p ad ee pa rn ea ee 184 Dynamic Renderllig oerte bre n reposer trices io eee a eec bos bep ot nd 184 Frame eie abe el Dui oigo direc 185 UN o
5. 237 Calibrating Distal Ge oa str Md 238 EB op e eb ROI e resp 238 Measuring angle cesso Ie ER A 239 Measuring AN a CONI IR 240 Calibrating all eg 241 Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities eese eere rennen 241 EDA Snapping sien pde Nares rete oe staph 242 Measuring DISTANCE ioni 243 Measuring Cumulative Distance eere reni veneto ene tee ci eda eo unte 244 Calibrating Distante oci ese eiae OR b aia d QI a cud ure adt Bn en uc a 245 Measuring AT8a a aah 245 Age eem 246 Measuring 247 Calibrating ab ale ben ee ie fece br 248 Measuring Minimum Distan Ce ereeeeeee esee eere te reete sontes tunes tantae totos tos eaten eo optat nte testen eos se 249 Acci TiS ict S Sessa tasto RU Ove OU tela dO GU ROM EN UN UE MNT 250 Hiding the box surrounding the 250 Adding a NEN RS ET DDR T 251 Nesting Mark p Entities sation ie jit tiger RO e p a d rud edo usd e eras 252 3D Specific
6. 289 PRINTING PREVIEWING A FILE BEFORE PRINTING Previewing a File Before Printing You can preview a print copy of the current active file on screen according to your printer s capabilities and the print property settings TASK 1 View the file in AutoVue 2 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print dm STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Configure the print properties 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can print the file from the Print Preview window by clicking Print You can also zoom in and out of a file as well as navigate from one page to another of a multi page file STEP RESULT The file appears in Print Preview Mode in the Print Preview window 5 Click Close to close the Print Preview window Printing a File You can print original files along with their Markup files and selected markup layers together so that they appear as one file TASK 1 Open the file you want to print 2 To print the associated markups open the Markup file or files you want to print 3 Ifyou are printing Markup files and you want to print the visible layers from the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears 4 Select the markup layers you want visible Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog 290 PRINTING BATCH PRINTING From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL I
7. RESULT The original file appears in the AutoVue workspace Generating Bill of Material BOM For EDA files you can obtain a list of the components and parts required for manufac turing the item featured in the schematic drawing or PCB design The Bill of Material BOM report produces a count of the unique components or parts needed for manufacturing It lists the quantity required component name reference desig nators value for resistors and capacitors size and descriptions When determining the uniqueness of a component the count considers only the attributes chosen for inclusion in the report output It includes only those attributes that provide the most accurate and unique component quantities TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Generate Bill of Material STEP RESULT If you are generating a BOM for a schematic with multiple pages a dialog appears prompting you to select the BOM scope Current page or Entire design Generate BOM BOM Scope 85 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION 2 Click OK after making your selection STEP RESULT The Generating BOM dialog appears listing the attributes of the file Generate BOM Please select attribute s that determine the uniqueness of a component part Attribute Part Type Location Rotation Component Definition Glued Layer Number of Connections Geometry Height L L LI Li O L L1 Sel
8. 130 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING A 3D MODEL 4 Dragthe mouse to where you want to move the part or parts To exit Manipulate mode click Manipulate 55 or from the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Rotating a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Manipulate STEP RESULT You are now in Manipulate mode 2 Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key when selecting STEP RESULT A model size representation of the Global Axes appears through the model part or parts and are enclosed by a three dimensional box 3 Clickand hold the mouse button on the sphere at the end of the axis you want to rotate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The initial mouse movement determines which of the two axes will mark the site of rotation If the axis you selected does not rotate around the right axis for the rotation that you want to make click the sphere again and move the mouse in a different direction 4 Clicking on an axis sphere allows rotation around one of the other two axes Move the mouse
9. Cut Options In the Define Section dialog you can use the following cut options to define the cut through of an object Option Description Dont Cut Display the object without a cut Cut Object displayed is cut along the section plane Invert Reverse the selection display the other part of the object Show Both Restore the cut part of the object Edges Only Display only the edges of the object along the section plane 140 WORKING WITH 3D FILES SECTIONING Defining the Section Plane and Cut through TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Section and then select Define ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Sectioning STEP RESULT The Define Section dialog appears From the Section Plane list select the orientation for the section plane From the Cut Options list select the cut option that you want To define the plane position click and drag the Plane Position slider to the posi tion you want Select Dynamic if you want the plane to move simultaneously with the slider Select Show Plane if you want the section plane visible Select Fill if you want the section plane filled ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The fill color can also be set from the Configuration dialog STEP RESULT The section plane is displayed as filled and the Section Area is calculated From the Measured Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the section surfac
10. STEP RESULT The Choose a New or an Existing Markup dialog appears If you wish to create a new Markup file to include in the Mobile Pack click Create a new Markup file If you wish to open Markup files included in the Mobile Pack click Choose an existing Markup file and then select the Markup files If the Markup file is password protected during creation The Password dialog appears In the Password field enter the password and then click OK If you wish to import a Markup file from your local machine click Import STEP REsULT The File Open dialog appears Select the Markup file and click Open Creating Markup Files When marking up a Mobile Pack you can create new markups or consolidate existing markups to a new markup You cannot modify markups that are bundled during Mobile Pack creation 304 AUTOVUE MOBILE DEFINING MARKUP POLICY When working with a Mobile Pack in the Desktop deployment of AutoVue you may be restricted from saving new markups editing markups deleting markups opening markups and filtering as a result of the markup policy The markup policy which is defined in Client Server deployment of AutoVue includes a set of rules to determine certain restrictions and privileges for users of the Mobile Pack To save a new Markup file with a Mobile Pack do the following TASK 1 Create markups 2 From the AutoVue toolbar click Save Markup STEP RESULT The Save Markup dialog appe
11. si 105 Global oe coat teed aie 105 Selecting Model Pats aE NEEE 106 Select Model Parts from the 106 Selecting All Identical Parts of a Model eese tenete ntnnttn 106 AERE an E EEA 107 Re Centering a Model to a Selected Model 107 All m 107 Entity Reference 107 Re Centering a Model to an Entity 108 Mode TIO uiua AMD eta EMO IU Mn i a 108 Expanding Collapsing the Model 109 Viewing Missing XRef Notification ICOn eese eren 109 Selecting Model Parts from the Model 110 Hiding Model Gin E DURO UAR NEAR a pean uu nea ta OR E 110 Creating 3D 1 0 05 assist tl ERR DORT e ERIT RENI a or 110 Deleting Models from a Mockup c sesssssssssscsessssssssssssssucsssssscsscsssssucsnccaccsscsscssscsucsuseaceascesceseesecens 111 Manipulating Display of a 3D Mode
12. 10 To disable a design rule deselect the check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can sort the design rules by clicking the column headings for Enabled Description or Value To add a value to the selected design rule double click the corresponding row of the Value column and enter a value ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The selected design rule must be enabled to be able to add a value In the Maximum Violations field enter the maximum number of results you want to display in the Results list From the Distance Units list select the unit you want to use as the unit of measure Click Verify ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Verify button changes to Stop stop the Design Verification process at any point click Stop When the process is complete the total number of errors found during the Design Verifi cation process up to the maximum number specified in the Maximum Violations field appear in the Results list To view the description of a violation result select the violation from the Results list STEP RESULT The description appears in the Description field The description includes information such as the type of violation the location where it occurs x and y coordi nates the component or entity it affects and the actual value measured When you select a violation result AutoVue zooms to the entity or set of entities that were affected and highlights them on the drawing Continue to select violation results to
13. 6 Click OK RESULT The consolidated Markup file is saved If you selected Open as Active Markup the consol idated markup opens and is set as the active markup 210 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Marking up 2D and 3DFiles AutoVue provides a number of markup options that display the same behavior when marking up 2D or 3D files You can add markup entities such as attachments hyperlinks signoffs and stamps See 2D Specific Markups for information on markup entities that are specific to 2D files See 3D Specific Markups for information on markup entities that are specific to 3D files NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel the action The following tables lists common markup entities for 2D and 3D files Option Attachment Description Add an attachment entity to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment D See Adding an Attachment Hyperlink Intellistamp Attaches a hyperlink as a markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Hyperlink 3e See Adding a Hyperlink Adds a stamp to a document in a connected and disconnected environment Includes specific document and user information metadata pulled directly from the DMS ERP PLM UCM system From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Intellistamp 2 See AutoVue Mobile Creating an Intellistamp
14. Feature AutoVue Office AutoVue 2D AutoVue 3D Professional AutoVue EDA AutoVue Electro Mechanical Professional Advanced Professional Professional File Properties x x Edit Select and Copy x x x x Open URL x x x x Open File from Server x x x Open File from Backend System X Open Local File x x x Page Navigation x x x x Print Batch Print x x Java Printing x x Native Printing x x x 2 Print Preview x x x Conversion Basic Conversion x X Conversion to 3 0 Conversion to PDF x x x x x Configuration x Work in Offline x x Not supported when AutoVue Server is installed on Linux OSes 2Not supported for 3 D designs and when AutoVue Server is installed on Linux OSes provides different configuration options for different file types 4Available only in the Client Server deployment of AutoVue 337 APPENDIX B AUTOVUE PRODUCT VARIATIONS FEATURE MATRIX 2 D Common Features Raster Graphics 2 D Vector Desktop Office EDA AutoVue 20 AutoVue 3D Professional AutoVue EDA AutoVue Electro Mechanical Feature AutoVue Office 5 Professional Advanced Professional Professional Overlays x X x x Text Search x x x x x Basic Manipulation Flip x x x x Rotate x x x x Zoom Special View Modes Magnify Glass x
15. Magnify Window x Pan and Zoom Window x x x x Align and Scale x Compare Files x x x x x 5Not supported for raster formats Not supported for spreadsheet formats Raster Graphics Features 5 AutoVue 2D AutoVue 3D Professional AutoVue EDA AutoVue Electro Mechanical Feature AutoVue Office 1 Professional Advanced Professional Professional Image Enhancements Anti Alias x x x x x Contrast x x x x x Invert x x TApplies to raster formats and to raster overlays in other formats 338 APPENDIX B AUTOVUE PRODUCT VARIATIONS FEATURE MATRIX 2 D Vector Features Feature AutoVue Office AutoVue 20 AutoVue 3D Professional AutoVue EDA AutoVue Electro Mechanical Professional Advanced Professional Professional Measurements Entity Snapping x Angle x x Arc x x Area x x x Calibration x x Distance x x 2 D CAD Features Blocks Drawing Information x x x Layers x Views XRefs Conversion Change Pen Settings x x x Printing Create Assign Pen Settings x x x available when AutoVue Server is installed on Windows OSes 339 APPENDIX B AUTOVUE PRODUCT VARIATIONS FEATURE MATRIX EDA Features Feature Auto
16. switch between multiple occurrences of a selected component do the following a From the Navigation Panel select a component in one file that has multiple compo nent occurrences in the other file b From the dialog of the file with multiple component occurrences select one of the components from the Occurrences list or click Next or Previous to switch between component occurrences Chapter 6 scm Scope Automatic Type Occurrences Counter NET19 12 Select any entity in the schematic drawing RESULT The same entity is highlighted in the PCB design Cross Probing Between 2D and 3D Views of the Same File The Cross Probe option lets you select entities to highlight in the 2D and 3D views of the same file TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Cross Probe ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Cross Probe 0 STEP REsULT The Cross Probe dialog appears 2 Click Add File In the Open dialog that appears select the same file then click Open 4 Inthe Cross Probe dialog click OK STEP REsULT The file appears in a new AutoVue window The views that display in each window depend on the contents of file you are cross probing 5 fthefile does not contain a schematic one window shows the 2 dimensional view of the PCB and the other shows the 3 dimensional view of the PCB 82 WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING 6 Ifthe file contains a schematic as well a
17. Creating a Mobile Pack The Mobile Pack includes the native file or streaming file metadata Intellistamp designs all reference files XRefs and associated markups Optionally you can include renditions such as TIFF or PDF 299 AUTOVUE MOBILE CREATING A MOBILE PACK The following steps explain how to create a Mobile Pack for a file with attached Markup files TASK 1 Open the base file 2 From the AutoVue menu bar select Collaborate and then select Create Mobile Pack STEP RESULT The Create Mobile Pack dialog appears It displays the General and Advanced tabs which contain the basic and advanced options for creating a Mobile Pack respec tively 3 Clickthe General tab Create Mobile Pack Base File Select Resource File s Resouce Type Resource File cadfont map utoCAD small5 uff utoCAD shape2 uff AD small Select Markup File s Password Name UtoCAD 777 Output Save As Browse v E Mail Password Protected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The following table lists the options available in the General tab Option Description Base File Displays the file path of the base file 300 AUTOVUE MOBILE CREATING A MOBILE PACK Select Resource File s Lists all the fonts XRefs and other external resources that are used to fully Option Description display the base file As a default all resource files are sel
18. From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 25 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the angle between three points Snapping modes are displayed 246 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 10 11 12 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snap ping modes click All Off Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle If you selected From 3 Points click three points to define the angle If you selected Between 2 Lines click two lines to define the angle STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them Right click to complete the measurement STEP REsULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured angle appears in the Measurement Enti ties dialog To change the size of the arc click and drag the it to the desired size To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take
19. Red cobi 61 Customizing o Bb iSo oos eddie te ee na eed pn E cei D RH ON 62 Components oeste m ORO Lat nca d e Oo atf 63 eite ie ipa DR een eels ek Moe 64 Bookmarks credentes esaet kde desee edes lec eet de 65 Selecting ENCES a odore m nmt heirs e p RH rr R eri Perl ag sci p 65 From the Navigation arra oa etat eroe nm revenu E EUREN 66 Fromm the Works cie RU RO E ne foa doo ao aaa 66 From the Entity Search Dialog 67 ZOOMING to a Selected 67 Filtering Entity Fy DGS eodeni erede ipe tercio ne he e M 68 Entity leiden corde Renee OCA ter Up e ean RO Rr E 68 Viewing the Properties of an EAU cadi te ism guste cnt 69 Navigating Design Hierarchy eset eene 72 Navigating using Ascend oot tib tret obe eee breton ie uds 72 LAY ONS sud uiam E pn puldhtqe bad pimidifat mue tun Uo unten pt pF set RR ARI CAR dO 72 Physical and Logical Layers 5 6 73 Changing the Order of Layers 74 Modifying Visibility for Physical 5 74 Modifying Visibility
20. Section Transformation x x User Defined Coordinate Systems x x User Defined View x x 3 D Measurements Entity Snapping x x x Angle 3 0 features in AutoVue EDA Professional are only available when viewing 3 D PCBs 341 APPENDIX B AUTOVUE PRODUCT VARIATIONS FEATURE MATRIX 3 D Features ae Advanced Professor Profesional Arc x x Calibrate x 9 Distance x x x Edge x x Minimum Distance x 9 x Surface x x Vertex Coordinates x x 3 D Search 3 D Entity Search x x 3 D Text Search x x Compare Compare 3 D Designs x x Compare Sets x x x Walkthrough x x x The 3 D features in AutoVue EDA Professional are only available when viewing 3 D PCBs Markup Features Feature AutoVue Office AutoVue 20 AutoVue 3D Professional AutoVue EDA AutoVue Electro Mechanical Professional Advanced Professional Professional Create and Save x x x Consolidate Import Export x x Layers x x x x Markup Filtering x x x Markup Information x x x Modify x x x x Saved States x x x x x Markup Entities Attachment x x x Hyperlink x x x Intellistamp x x x x 342 APPENDIX B AUTOVUE PRODUCT VARIATIONS FEATURE MATRIX Markup Features Feature AutoVue Office Au
21. When marking up 3D files you can attach text or a note as well as create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel 3D Markup Entities Youcan create many different types of markup entities To access the markup entities from the Markup menu select Add Entity The markup entities are Option Description To complete a markup entity for example to finish creating a box simply right click in the AutoVue workspace 252 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Option Description Text Add text to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click 3D Text See Adding Text Attachment Add an attachment entity to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment N See Adding an Attachment Hyperlink Click the workspace to attach a hyperlink From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Hyperlink 3e See Adding a Hyperlink Intellistamp Add a stamp on a document in a connected and disconnected environment Includes specific document and user information metadata pulled directly from the DMS ERP PLM UCM system From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Intellistamp 2 See Creating an Intellistamp AutoVue Mobile Measurement Create markup measure entities From the Markup Entity t
22. A hole used for the mechanical support of a PCB or for the mechanical attachment of components to a PCB 333 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Multi layer board Definition A PCB that has multiple layers separated by dielectric material with connectivity between layers established by vias or through holes This term usually refers to a board with more than two layers Net A logical construct circuit that originates in a schematic and is transferred to a board to describe required electrical connections The connections may be completed by using vias tracks or zones Net list List of names of symbols or parts and their connection points which are logically connected in each net of a circuit A net list can be extracted electronically on a computer from a properly prepared schematic Obstacle An outline representing an object on the board It must be taken into account during routing placement or copper pour Pad On a PCB a copper shape on one or more layers there may be a hole and an isolation surrounding the copper used for connecting a component pin to the PCB The pad indicates where pins of a component are placed Padstack A numbered list of pad descriptions Each description contains a pad definition including layer style drill diameter size offset and solder mask guard width PCB Printed Circuit Board A PCB is a board made up o
23. RESULT Snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more information 6 Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit 8 Ifyou selected From Points click three points on the drawing to define the angle 9 Ifyou selected Between 2 Lines click two lines on the drawing to define the angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them The angle measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 10 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 57 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Arcin non Vector Files Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and calculate its arc center radius diam eter and arc length TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Arc tab 3 Inthe Arc Info section select a unit of measurement from the Length Units list in which to measure the length of the arc 4 Inthe Measured Angle section select a unit of measurement from the Sweep Units list in which
24. User LOGI D14 NO NO aproje A D13 No proje D12 NO NO proje Dil Dproje 010 proje 01 proje 00 proje CLRCNT No proje y lt gt a Nodes on Net Name Net PinUse Pads R5 2 CLK4 UNSPEC 5 050 1 123 9 CLK4 IN 5 050 1 1122 13 CLK4 OUT 5 050 1 lt Components Nets Bookmarks 1 64 WORKING WITH EDA FILES BOOKMARKS TAB Bookmarks Tab The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views Draft views 2D plans 3D Views of an EDA design or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as PDF Bookmarks Design 3D Model Components Mets Bookmarks Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model Space the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark click it to expand and view the lower book mark levels If a minus sign appears to the left ofthe bookmark click it to collapse the lower bookmark levels To go to a destination specified by a bookmark click the bookmark text or the page icon located to the left of the bookmark text Selecting Entities Selecting an entity or entities is often the first step to many of the operations that you perform with EDA files The following sections provide
25. Y Date Year 96M Date Month 96D Date Day W Date Day of week 96H Time Hour U Time Minute 965 Time Seconds r New line F Native Print Settings Excel NOTE A literal percentage mark is entered manually as You can also print system variables in headers and footers Select a variable from the Insert Variable list Some Insert Variable options are user name browser and java home Adding a Header and Footer In the Headers Footers tab you can manually enter text or choose from a list of Insert Codes to appear in the headers and footers You can also print system variables TASK 1 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Headers Footers tab 3 Click in the Left Center or Right field to specify where you want the text to appear in the header and footer then enter the text ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can have text appear in the Left Center and Right of a header and footer 4 Insert Code in the header or footer click Left Center Right then select a code from the list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example if you select 9on Total document pages the total number of pages for the selected file will appear in the header and footer 5 Tochange the Font click Set Font STEP RESULT The Font dialog appears 284 PRINTING HEA
26. 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers The Markup Layers dialog appears 208 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS 2 To show hide a layer or layers perform one of the following a Select a layer and click Toggle The layer s check box will switch between selected and deselected To view all the markup layers click All On To hide all markup layers click All Off b From the Markup Layers list select the check box next to the layer or layers you want visible and deselect the check box next to the layer or layers you want to hide 3 Click OK RESULT The markup entities belonging to the selected layer or layers appear in the workspace on top of the original file Deleting a Markup Layer From the Markup Layers dialog you can choose to delete a selected layer and its associated markup entities TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 From the Markup Layers list select the markup layer you want to delete Click Delete 4 ClickOK RESULT The layer or layers are deleted along their associated entities Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer Once you create a markup entity it is possible to assign it to a pre existing markup layer TASK 1 2 Select the markup entity or entities that you want to move From the Markup menu select Format and then select Move to Layer ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right cli
27. 131 Scaling a Model Along the X Y and 2 46 132 Part ABOn elite e d ar etm eee nde d enden er E IRR REM 132 Part Alignment cono Dod RR NE do C ann vtri n B d e HN e Ra 133 Aligning Model Parts 134 3D MOY psy 135 Transforming Model Using Illustration 136 Resetting the Transformation of a 3D 138 Transforming Model by Setting 139 EU ENORMI NTC S RUM M TERIS 139 SECTION Plan donis dvor tutes a palet Nd Pas NOE OR 140 C t ree eet csi ce eee Ie c 140 Defining the Section Plane and Cut through cscsscssesssssessscssssssssecssseseessssscsssssessseseesnsescensees 141 EXportinig Section Ed 141 FHI CHI IVT be ern Save vents 142 Explode Options Fa eb ad ta e D ERR 142 Explodinga 3D Model egeta ade idee debi ere rs 143 Saving an Exploded View of a 3D 144 User Defined Coordinate Systerms seii pe decoro oper ese
28. 33VDC UNSF C341 2 GND UNSF EN gt Components Nets Bookmarks Nets Tab NOTE The Nets tab displays only for EDA drawings The Nets tab lists nets and associated net nodes pins connected to a net The top portion of the tab lists all the nets of the drawing s currently displayed page The lower portion of the tab lists the associated net nodes for the selected nets 24 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Allselected nets are highlighted on the drawing To select more than one net press the Shift or Control key while selecting Alternately in the Nets panel you can click and drag in the Navigation Panel list to select multiple nets The Nodes on Net panel lists the associated nodes for the selected nets Nets customize Name Parti User LOGI D14 proje 013 proje 012 proje 011 Dproje 10 proje 01 proje proje CLRCNT NO proje SS A EM MEM mE mM lt Nodes on Net Name Net PinUse Pads R5 2 CLK4 UNSPEC 023 9 022 13 CLK4 5 050 5 050 5 050 lt i Components Nets Bookmarks Models Tab and Model Tree The Models tab displays the Model Tree The tree displays the model s hierarchy inter rela tion of different parts as
29. Bottom Center and so on You can define custom alignment by entering a X and Y value Document Pages Specify the document pages to print All Current or Range 280 PRINTING PRINT OPTIONS Option Page Area Type Description Select the page area to print Extents Print the extent of the document Displayed Print the area displayed in the View window Option is only enabled when Current is selected for Document Pages Limits Prints the file limits instead of extents Option is only enabled when Current is selected for Document Pages Selected Print selected area When option is selected the select button is enabled allowing you to select an area on the drawing Option will only be enabled when Current is selected for Document Pages Force to Black Force all colors to black JAVA Printing When selected and printing a 3D file or office document Word Excel or PDF a high quality printout of the image is rendered using Java capabilities On Windows OSes you can deslect this option to use native printing capabilites NOTE By default this option is selected Send Page As Images This features is available when JAVA Printing is selected When selected and printing a 3D file or office document Word Excel or PDF an image is requested from the server and then sent to the printer on the client When deselected the page is rendere
30. Highlights arcs on the The arc is highlighted when you hover the mouse model pointer 163 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Button Arc Center Description Highlights arcs and circles on the model Behavior The arc is highlighted and a tooltip appears indicating the arc center coordinate of the arc when you hover the mouse pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the arc center is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite arc axis is selected Face Plane aa Highlights faces when you move the cursor over a face The face is highlighted when you hover the mouse pointer Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two vertices edges arc axes faces or any combination of these entity types NOTE This release of AutoVue includes improved 3D measurement capabilitites If you wish to revert the previous release s distance measurement interface set the SHOW POINTOPOINT PAGE INI option Refer to the Installation and Administration Manual for more information The following table details how the distance between two entities are measured using snap ping modes 164 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Snapping Vertex Line Arc Center Plane Mode Entities Vertex Distance The shortest The shortest The shortest between two segment connecting segment c
31. TRUE SaveExistingMarkup lt TRUE FALSE gt If TRUE resave of existing Markup file is allowed If FALSE the Markup file from the Mobile Pack cannot be re saved The Markup Save command will be disabled for the existing Markup file TRUE EditMarkup lt TRUE FALSE gt If TRUE the Markup file can be edited If FALSE the Markup file is opened as read only All manipulation commands at all levels Markup file markup layers and markup entities are disabled Setting EditMarkup False is equivalent to the Hide Icon menu option TRUE DeleteMarkup lt TRUE FALSE gt NOTE Only available for a Mobile Pack created with DMS files If TRUE the Delete Markup menu option is enabled in the Markup File Open dialog If FALSE the Delete Markup menu option is disabled in the Markup File Open dialog TRUE OpenMarkup lt TRUE FALSE gt If TRUE the Markup file is listed in the Markup File Open dialog If FALSE the Markup files is not listed in the Markup File Open dialog TRUE AutoOpenMarkup lt TRUE FALSE gt If TRUE the Markup file opens automatically when opening the Mobile Pack If FALSE the Markup file does not open automatically when opening the Mobile Pack FALSE 306 AUTOVUE MOBILE DEFINING MARKUP POLICY Action Description Default FilterAttrFromGUI lt GUI gt lt P If TRUE the given property value is removed from FALSE rop gt lt Value gt
32. This is the Markup file created during the Collaboration Session All participants can add Markup entities to the Session Markup file NOTE Only the Host can save the Session Markup Save and Save As are disabled for all other users Show Tracker The Show Presenter Window option in the Collaborate menu is available to any user whose view is set to unlocked When you select Show Tracker from the Collaborate menu the Presenter Window appears displaying a bird s eye view of the base file viewed and the Markup changes done during the Collaboration Session When you use Show Presenter Window you can simultaneously track the Controller s base file view changes and everyone s markup changes in the Presenter Window while your main window display remains unaffected by anyone s modifications It is like having a locked view and an unlocked view on hand at the same time Collaboration Session The Collaborate menu provides you with a means to initiate a Collaboration Session or join an existing session When you initiate a Collaboration Session a session object is created on the server and you are the Host and Controller of the session The Host owns the 314 REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION Session Markup and is the only one who can save it and open an existing Markup The Host can also invite other users during a session Initiating a Collaboration Session When you initiate a Collaboration Session a session object
33. Translation imm x fo x fo Y 0 Y 0 2 0 2 0 Mirror Scale Yz O xz C ree NOTE From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Transform In the Transformation dialog the buttons on the left correspond to a rotational movement along the three axes and the buttons on the right correspond to a translational movement along the three axes and the scaling up and down Transforming a Model Using Illustration Buttons TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Define ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Transform STEP RESULT The Transformation dialog appears 2 Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate translate or scale ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting If no part is selected transformation is applied to the entire model 3 Use the rotate or translate buttons to transform the model 136 WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL 4 Tosetthe translate rotate and scale increments click Options ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When you click a rotation translation or scale button the model transforms in increments of the values entered in the Options dialog STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears Enter the Translate Increment value in inches Enter the Rotate Increment value in degrees Enter the Scale Increment valu
34. markups are disabled for Office documents For information on how to enable markups for Office documents refer to the INI Options chapter in the Installation and Administration Manual Markup Navigation Tree When you are in Markup mode a Markup Navigation Tree appears below the workspace If the tree does not appear from the Options menu select Show Panel and then select Markup Panel Markups va Markup Entity Author LastModified A Page Layer Z Untitled2 Test JohnDoe 04 03 2008 11 51 06 amp M 1 0 3 Leader JohnDoe 04 03 2008 11 51 08 1 0 bnb JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 22 AM 1 0 27 Highlight JohnDoe 04 03 2008 11 51 24 1 0 L3 Box JohnDoe 04 03 2008 11 51 28 AM 1 0 Z Line JohnDoe 04 03 2008 11 51 31 AM 1 0 The tree displays a hierarchy of markups or comments created by users You can navigate through the markups A set of properties is generated for each markup You can sort the markups in the tree according to each property by clicking the column headers These properties are Property Description Markup Entity Type of markup entity created Author The name of the user who created the markup entity Last Modified The date and time the markup entity was last modified Page Page number of the original document on which the markup entity is created Layer Markup layer on which the markup entity is created 198 MARKUPS FiLTERING MARKUPS When
35. then click Save ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values file 9 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog Measuring in EDA Files In EDA files you can take measurements of distances areas arcs and so on When measuring you have the option to snap to geometrical or electrical points on the drawing From the Analysis menu select Measure to access the Measurement options NOTE From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure The following table outlines the available measuring options Name Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points Arc Measure an arc entity Area Measure a selected area Distance Measure the distance between two points Minimum Distance Measure the minimum distance between entities EDA Snapping Modes The snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical or electrical points For example when you select Snap to Pin move the cursor over the pin you want to select until 95 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES the pin is highlighted then click Highlight and click a second pin to measure the distance between them The snapping modes allow you to snap to the middle center and end points of an entity as well as a pin via and symbol The following table outlines the available snapping modes Button Snap To Description x End point Geometric snap mode where a s
36. values for the vertices are displayed The UCS axes are reoriented to the selected vertices Deleting a User Coordinate System TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Set User Coordinate System STEP RESULT The User Coordinate Systems dialog appears want to delete 3 Click Delete ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The UCS disappears from the list From the Coordinate System list select the trihedral coordinate system that you Click OK to close the User Coordinate Systems dialog Modifying a User Defined Coordinate System TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Set User Coordinate System STEP RESULT The User Coordinate Systems dialog appears 146 WORKING WITH 3D FILES USER DEFINED COORDINATE SYSTEMS From the Coordinate Systems list select the UCS that you want to modify STEP RESULT The settings you configured for the UCS are displayed To change the name highlight the name and enter the new one To change the position of the UCS click the Position tab then from the Define From list select the point where you want the UCS axes to appear To change the orientation click the Orientation tab then from the Define From list select the point where you want to orient the UCS To show the UCS axes select Show Trihedron To hide the UCS axes deselect the check box To change the UCS that it is relative to select the UCS from the Relative To list Click OK to close the User Coordinate
37. 11 12 13 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snap ping modes click All Off Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas select Add in the Measurement Entities dialog To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line and the measurement appears in the Measure ment Entities dialog If you selected Shape click the edge of a predefined shape on the drawing STEP RESULT The shape is highlighted Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement Entities dialog Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1
38. AutoVue goes into Collaboration mode and the session is started The user or users that are invited receive a tooltip notification that he or she has been invited to join the session The notification message indicates the Session Name File and Initiator 315 REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION Changing a User s Layer Color of a Session TASK 1 Inthe Initiate Session dialog click Layer Color STEP RESULT The Layer Color dialog appears 2 Selecta Layer Color from the list or select Let user choose if you want the user to choose their own color 3 Click OK STEP RESULT In the Initiate Session dialog the selected layers color appears beside the Username in the Invited list RESULT If you selected Let user choose a custom color appears beside the Username indi cating that the color can be changed By User Adding New Users to a Session You can also invite users that are not currently online using the Add New button on the Initiate Session dialog TASK 1 Inthe Initiate Session dialog click Add New STEP RESULT The Add User dialog appears 2 Enter Username Select Observer if you want to designate the user as an Observer 4 Select a Layer Color from the list or select Let user choose if you want the user to choose their own color 5 Click OK RESULT The new user is added to the Invited list in the Initiate Session dialog NOTE To add more than one user repeat
39. Current applet window Opens the file in the current AutoVue window A new browser window Opens the file in the default browser window A current browser window Opens the file in the current browser window 7 Click OK 8 Right click to exit hyperlink creation mode RESULT The hyperlink appears on the Markup 214 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Opening a Hyperlink To open a hyperlink double click on it from the workspace The hyperlink file opens in the window you selected in the Establish Hyperlink dialog Editing a Hyperlink TASK 1 In the Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace select the hyperlink that you want to edit From the Markup menu select Format and then select Edit Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the hyperlink and select Format and then select Edit Hyperlink STEP RESULT The Establish Hyperlink dialog appears Edit the information that you want Click OK to close the Establish Hyperlink dialog RESULT The changes are saved Deleting a Hyperlink TASK 1 In the Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace select the hyperlink that you want to delete 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Remove Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the hyperlink and select Format and then select Remove Hyperlink You can also delete the hyperlink by selecting the hyperlink and pressing the Delete key on your
40. Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 23 Arc Measure an arc entity From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc a Area Measure a selected area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area Distance Measure the distance between two points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance Minimum Distance Measure the minimum distance between entities From the Markup Entity toolbar click Minimum Distance zd EDA Snapping Modes The snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical or electrical points For example when you select Snap to Pin move the cursor over the pin you want to select until the pin is highlighted then click Highlight and click a second pin to measure the distance between them The snapping modes allow you to snap to the middle center and end points of an entity as well as a pin via and symbol The following table outlines the available snapping modes 242 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Button Snap To Description M End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the components end point Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear component Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears
41. Display dialog appears and lists the layers and layer visibility for the current active file 2 Tosort the list of layers in the dialog click the Name column header to sort alpha betically or numerically or click the Status column header to group by visibility Select the check box beside the layers that you want to display 4 Deselect the check box beside the layers that you want to hide Click OK to close the Select the Layers to Display dialog RESULT The selected layers are displayed Entity Properties You can view properties such as visibility color transparency mass properties and extents of a model or model parts General Attributes The Attributes tab displays a model or model part s attributes The list of attributes varies depending on the model Some of the viewable General attributes are as follows Attribute Description Color Color of the selected model part Density The density of the model or selected model parts Name The model part name or the displayed page name of the model Render Mode The dynamic rendering used for displaying model or model part For example Shaded Shaded Wire and Wireframe 123 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Attribute Description Transparency The value between 0 and 1 representing the model or model part s degree of transparency 0 opaque 1 transparent Visibility The value True visible or False invisible for a model or model par
42. FILES Saving Search Results 9 Click Search STEP RESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appears in the Results list 10 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog TASK 1 Perform a 3D entity search 2 Click Search STEP RESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear in the Results list displaying the type and name 3 Tosavethe results click Export STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears 4 Specifythe path where you want to store the file and enter the file name then click Save RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values file Measuring in 3D Files AutoVue provides the ability to perform measurements in 3D files When measuring AutoVue provides the option to snap to different entity types on the model From the Analysis menu select Measure to access the Measurement options NOTE From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure The following table outlines the available measuring options Angle Name Description Measure the precise angle between any three vertices or any two edges planes faces or any combination of these entity types 162 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Arc Name center point Description Measure the precise radius length and angle of any arc and calculate the Distance Measure the precise distance between any two vertices edges m
43. Look Ahead is selected and you zoom into a part of a file AutoVue renders adjacent tiles The advantage to this is improvement in performance when zooming in on parts of a file The disadvantage is that if the client machine is idle for at least one second Enable Look Ahead is triggered which could slow down current operations However once all tiles are rendered all zoom operations speed up again If Enable Look Ahead is deselected Auto Vue renders the tiles when requested that is only when you zoom in on parts of the file 179 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS Resources If Resolve Local Resources is selected and AutoVue tries to locate XREFs on the client side using client path settings If not found on the client side AutoVue will attempt to retrieve the XREFs on the server If Resolve Local Resources is unchecked AutoVue attempts to resolve the XRefs on the server side only Configuring Paths Configure the paths for XRefs and fonts These path settings are read only if Resolve Local Resources is checked When working with files that need external resources such as fonts or XRefs you may need to specify the path to these external resources if they do not exist in the same location as the base file Path Description XRefs The directory paths for any external reference files associated with 2D 3D or EDA files Font The directory paths for fonts required by Auto Vue s vector files Configu
44. Model Transformation Explosion Render Modes Color Transpar ency Visibility Sectioning Camera Settings and views involving Mockups 2 Fromthe View menu select Views select User Defined Views and then select Add View ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Views then select User Defined Views and then select Add View STEP RESULT The Add User Defined View dialog appears Enter a view name for the view that you want to define 4 Click OK to close the Add User Defined View dialog RESULT To see the view you defined click the Views tab and select it from the User Defined Views tree or select Views select User Defined Views NOTE You can also alternate between User Defined Views and Standard Views without affecting your personalized views Deleting a User Defined View TASK 1 Under the User Defined Views tree select the view that you want to delete then right click and select Delete STEP RESULT A confirmation prompt appears 2 Click Yes RESULT The view disappears from the tree 121 WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D ViEWS Displaying the Perspective Projection of a 3D Model The Perspective option shows objects in three dimensions with distances planes and curved surfaces adjusted to give a sense of depth that reflects the desired perspective to the eye NOTE You can use the Perspective option in any of the 3D Views since it is a projection mode rat
45. Restore last view v Show walkthrough dialog at startup o House dwg AutoCAD 2007 2009 10000085 Pa 3j3 1721664 bytes May 3 2007 Models Views Bookmarks o In Walkthrough mode you can manipulate the view of a 3D model as if you are walking or flying through the model take measurements of the model and change the camera position and orientation For example when viewing a 3D model of house you can enter the front door and move between rooms and floors All the while you have a 360 degree view of your surroundings and the ability to add markups The Walkthrough feature can also be utilized when using the Collaborate feature in AutoVue Observers can view the Controller s walkthrough of the 3D model in real time See Real Time Collaboration for more information on the Collaborate feature 172 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH Walkthrough Dialog To enter Walkthrough mode from the View menu select Walkthrough The Walkthrough dialog appears Walkthrough Instructions Walk forward backward Left click and drag mouse up down or up down arrow key Turn left right Left click and drag mouse left right or left right arrow key More navigation options Press Ctrl Alt or Shift Move through walls C Restore last view Show walkthrough dialog at startup NOTE Closing the Walkthrough dialog does not exit Walkthrough mode To exit you must
46. Sw _ SNA 11 0001 52 SW _ SNA 49 0001 J2 USBAF 23 0001 DISPLAY1 SEGSMD 29 0001 gt Component Pins Name Location With A U5 1 47 1500 false U5 2 47 1500 false U5 3 47 1500 false U5 4 47 1500 false U5 5 47 1500 false U5 6 47 1500 false Customizing Columns In the Navigation Panel you can sort a column change column order or hide show a column To sort a column click the column heading TASK 1 change the column order or to show hide a column click Customize STEP RESULT The Customize Columns dialog appears 2 Select the check box beside the column or columns you want to display Deselect the check box beside the column or columns you want to hide ADDITIONAL INFORMATION show all columns click Show All To hide all columns click Hide All 62 WORKING WITH EDA FILES COMPONENTS TAB 3 To change the column order select the column you want to move then click Move Up to move the column up in the list or click Move Down to move the column down in the list 4 Tosavethe changes you made to the columns select Save column settings STEP RESULT The new column settings will be retained the next time the file is opened 5 Click OK RESULT The changes appear in the Navigation Panel Components Tab NOTE The Components tab displays only for EDA drawings The Components tab lists component instances and the associated pins The to
47. The shape is highlighted The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 13 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Angle tab 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the angle between three points STEP RESULT Snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See EDA Snapping Modes 5 Select Between 2 Lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines 6 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 7 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the angle 8 Ifyou selected Between 2 Lines click two lines to define the angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them The angle measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 100 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to define or select an arc in the drawing and mea
48. Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 Fromthe Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance lt 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To clear all snapping modes click All Off 4 From Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 5 Clicka point on the drawing to define the starting point 236 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 6 Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP REsULT The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active markup 7 Movethe cursor and click a location on the drawing to display the measure distance STEP REsULT The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in the Measurement Entities dialog To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles You can click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 10 Cli
49. Zoom In Zoom in by a factor of 2 From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click e Zoom Out Zoom out by a factor of 2 From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click Q Zoom Previous Reverts to the previous zoom level From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click Q NOTE You can also right click the workspace and select Zoom Previous Full Resolution Display the file at full resolution From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click 37 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Menu Fit Horizontal Sub Menu Description Fit the image horizontally in the active window The vertical dimensions of the image are zoomed proportionally but may be too large or small for the window NOTE You can also right click the workspace and select Zoom Page Width Vertical Fit the image vertically in the active window The horizontal dimensions of the image are zoomed proportionally but may be too large or small for the window Both AutoVue finds the best fit for the current file with respect to both its vertical and horizontal dimensions From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click NOTE You can also right click the workspace and select Zoom Fit Magnify Glass Magnify an area of the file that is specified by the cursor location See Using the Magnify Glass for more information Magnify Window Magnify a selected area of a f
50. a markup entity is created it appears in the tree and the information is recorded and saved in the Markup file NOTE Hover your mouse over an entity to display its author and date properties Filtering Markups When viewing markups you have the option to filter the Markup files or entities that are displayed based on their metadata information To do so from the Markup menu select Filter and then select one ofthe following options By Author By Entity Types By Last Modified By Page and By Layer The Filter Markup Visibility dialog appears NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Markup Filter To display markups created by a specific author click the Author tab and select the check box next to the author s name To remove an author s markup from the filter deselect the associated check box In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Author column header display markups by entity type click the Markup Entity tab and select the check box next to the markup entity or entities To remove a markup entity from the filter deselect the associated check box In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Markup Entity column header To display markups based on when they were last modified click the Last Modified tab From the list select one of the following options Anytime Option Description Displays all markup entities Before Displays all ma
51. a text search on raster files 35 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Option Description Match Whole Word Only Match a complete word Match Case Search for a word or text string with specific capitalization Up Search backward in the document Down Search forward in the document TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Find Text STEP RESULT The Find dialog appears 2 Enter the word or phrase that you want to find in the Find What field ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you are searching in a vector file select a text string from the list You can refine your search by selecting Match Whole Word Only or Match Case 4 ClickFind Next STEP RESULT AutoVue highlights the text and zooms into the text area 5 Click Close to close the Find dialog 2D Viewing Options From the View menu you can change how the active file is displayed in the workspace For example you can zoom into an area of the drawing magnify a part of the drawing and rotate a file s orientation clockwise counterclockwise or flip a file s orientation along the horizontal or vertical axis You can access these options from the View menu The options are 36 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Menu Sub Menu Description Zoom Zoom Box Click and drag to draw a box around an object that you want to enlarge to fill the window From the Autovue toolbar you in work space and select from pop up menu
52. all parts ON in the display All Invisible Force all parts OFF in the display To display model parts select the part s from the Model Tree PMI Initial Visibility With the PMI Initial Visibility option you have the option to set a threshold for the number of PMIs to display for large models To do select the Don t display PMI for large models check box and then enter the number of PMIs to display in the PMI Threshold field PMI Filtering From the tree expand 3D and then select PMI to display the PMI options The PMI Filtering options let you configure which types of product and manufacturing information to display The check boxes in the Tree column let you select which PMI entity 186 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES types display in the 3D model tree The check boxes in the View column let you select which PMI entity types display in the workspace The following PMI Text Rendering Style options let you define the style for the PMI text Option Description Native Setting from PMI text displays with the default setting file 3D PMI text displays in 3 dimensions It may not always face you Flat to screen PMI text always faces you Configuring Color With the Color options you can configure the color to allow easier viewing of 3D file details From the Configuration tree expand 3D and then select Colors to view the available Color options They a
53. and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services Contents Preface T eseina P P ai 13 13 Document AccessiDIlby 13 Accessibility of Code Examples in 13 Accessibility of Links to External Web Sites in Documentation s 14 TTY Access to Oracle Support Services eee e eese reete entente ttes snstsat 14 Related DocUttients cec deve e dede 14 CONVENON Sonans eE Erer rd ed eaa a E eon us ia TESE ESELS EES Ce ine bn pp 14 A AE E E Ec EA E 17 Oracle AUtOVU det eo RU Oen denti Eos endi Mtm ne I ANE 17 Marking Lb Documents sens Medea editas Nota co eco te the A ee oed 17 A t V e Ba SiS aU etu d eie a QR PRU RU OR RUE RR RN oan ola ana 19 AutoVue Version Information cssssssssscssecssccssessscssccesesssccssccssesssecssccesecssecesscsseessccsscessccuscessesssessscencenseessees 19 Viewing Version and Build Information eese e
54. another measurement Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius center and diam eter TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snap ping modes are displayed Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snap ping modes click All Off Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc From the Arc Info list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance of the arc 247 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 6 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 7 Select Add Radius if you want measure the radius 8 Select Add Diameter if you want to measure the diameter 9 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 10 If you selected an Arc Entity click an edge of the arc STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted 11 Click to complete the measurement STEP REsULT The measured line path measurem
55. are nets pins vias and traces TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Min Distance tab Select Set 1 3 to select the entities that you want to measure from 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the entities for the measure ment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you click Select Nets you cannot select any other type of entity See EDA Snapping Modes 5 Clickthe first set of entities on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To clear the last set of entities you selected click Clear Set STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted 6 Select Set 2 Ito select the entities that you want to measure to Click the second set of entities on the drawing STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted in a different color 8 From the Measured Min Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select Zoom to Result if you want to zoom into the measure ment on the drawing 98 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 9 Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is high lighted by a line The minimum measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measure Min Distance section of the dialog 10 Click Close to close the Meas
56. bar you can also click Unlock View STEP RESULT The Lock View to Presenter option is deselected 2 From the Collaborate menu select Show Presenter Window if you want to simultaneously track the Controller s base file view changes and everyone s markup changes while your markup file remains unchanged RESULT You can now track changes without affecting your view NOTE The Show Presenter Window option is only available when the view is unlocked Locking a View The Lock View to Presenter option allows you view changes the Controller is making When you select the Lock View to Presenter option you are also propagating your markup modifications to the other participants in the session Lock View to Presenter is the default for all participants in a session TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Lock View to Presenter ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Collaborate status bar you can also click Lock View to Presenter 2 RESULT The Lock View to Presenter option is highlighted 322 REAL TIME COLLABORATION CHAT WINDOW Viewing Session Information TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Session Information STEP RESULT The Session Information dialog appears displaying the Session Subject Session ID File Name Host and Users of the session 2 Click Close Leaving a Session Only a Host can close a Collaboration Session All other participants can leave a Collabo ration Session an
57. between three vertices or any two edges planes or faces From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 4 Arc Measure the precise radius length and angle of any arc and calculate the center point location From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc a Distance Measure the precise distance between any two Vertex Edge Midedge Arc Center or Face From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance d Minimum Distance Measure minimum distance between any two Vertex Edge Midedge Arc Center or Face From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Minimum Distance asd You cannot create a markup measure entity when measuring minimum distance Vertex Coordinates Provide the coordinates of each vertex From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Vertex Coordinates Xe 3D Snapping Modes Snapping modes allow you to select or snap to different entity types on a model For example if you select Vertex all vertices are highlighted and a snap box appears when you move the cursor over a vertex Snapping modes allow you to snap to the following entities NOTE The behavior of snapping modes change in regards to the selected measurement option For example the behavior of arc center is not the same for distance and minimum distance 254 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Button Description Behavior Vertex Highlights vertices the A snap b
58. can set are Option Description Maximum Depth Define up to which level you want to explode All entities from the root level to the specified level are exploded All entities on the other levels will not be exploded If you are exploding Whole model the number of available levels depends on how many explodable levels exist in the model For example if there are four levels with level 2 being the first level under the main assembly then level 3 and level 4 are added to the list Selected parts the number of available levels to be added to the list depends on the selected virtual tree Animated When selected animation is shown while exploding or imploding the model Show Arrows When selected arrows are displayed in an explosion assembly The arrow starts from an exploded entity and points to the center point of its parent 142 WORKING WITH 3D FILES EXPLODING Scroll Explode Dragging the slider gradually displays the progression of the explosion to Option Description show the explosion dynamics Explode pressing brings the explosion level to the n 1 level if current explosion level is between n 1 inclusive and n level exclusive Implode pressing brings the explosion level to the n level if current explosion level is between n 1 exclusive and n level inclusive Exploding a 3D Model TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Explode ADDITIONAL INFORMATIO
59. create and save a Markup file the view state of the file is also View states include zoom level extents rotation and flip settings transformation section plane and visibility When creating markups for 3D files containing imported models the imported design becomes part of the view state For EDA files you can save user defined layers sets with markups See Creating a User Defined View State information is also saved with each markup entity For instance if you were at a certain zoom level when you created a markup entity AutoVue saves the information with the markup entity To Go To the state you were at when you created or modified the markup entity from the Markup tree right click the markup entity and then select Go To 200 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Creating a Markup File To create a Markup file TASK 1 View a file that you want to markup 2 From the Markup menu select New ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click New Markup 27 RESULT AutoVue enters Markup mode and a new Markup file appears in the Markup Navigation Tree See Also Creating a Markup Layer Entering Markup Information When creating a markup you can provide user information that you can save with the markup From the Markup menu select Properties The Markup Information dialog appears Enter a user name department company name company location and telephone
60. distance to a value Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab 54 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Area non Vector Files Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure el SrEP REsULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options Click the Area tab In the Area Units list select a unit of measurement in which to measure the area of the region In the Perimeter Units list select a unit of measurement in which to measure the perimeter of the region ADDITIONAL INFORMATION In the Net Area Result group select Add to cumulate a net area result of different areas select Subtract to subtract an area from the net area result and select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Continue clicking points on the drawing to define the region you wantto measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measurements appear in their respective fields in the Area tab Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement Click C
61. entities are selected You can also select the markup entities from the Markup Navigation Tree To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 264 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES Moving a Markup Entity In the Markup Navigation Tree or in the workspace select the markup entity or entities that you want to move To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting In the workspace click and drag the selected markup entity or entities to anywhere in the workspace Transforming Markup Entities NOTE This menu option is only available for 2D and EDA files AutoVue provides the option to flip or rotate markup entities Rotating all Markup Entities From the Markup menu select Transform and then select Rotate From the menu that appears you have one of two options to select from Rotate Clockwise Rotates the markup entity 90 degrees in the clockwise direction e Rotate Counter Clockwise Rotates the markup entity 90 degrees in the counter clockwise direction NOTE The markup entities rotate with respect to the center point of the drawing Rotating a selected Markup Entity This feature is only supported for the Text and Stamp markup entities TASK 1 From the workspace or the Markup Navigation Tree select the markup entity to rotate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION It is not possible to select multiple markup entities to rotate 2 From the Markup menu sele
62. entity types TASK 1 10 11 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure i SrEP REsULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Min Distance tab Click M Set 1 From the Snapping Mode section select one of the following Select Entity if you want to measure the distance between model parts Snapping modes are disabled Select Geometry if you want to measure the distance between entity types Snap ping modes are enabled If you selected Entity select a part or parts on the model If you selected Geom etry select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To reset a set click Clear To clear items from a set select the items and press the Delete key To deselect a part or entity type on the model press the Control key and left click the part or entity type STEP RESULT The model parts appear in the list under Set 1 and are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree All entities of the selected entity type are highlighted on the model Click E Set 2 Repeat step 5 STEP RESULT The model part appears in the list under Set 2 From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is high lighted by a line The measured minimum distance X Y and Z coordinates for Pos
63. for the Left Top Right and Bottom margins Minimum Set the acceptable minimum margins for the selected printer Units Specify the unit for the margins 282 PRINTING HEADER FOOTER Setting the Margins TASK 1 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print eB STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Click the Margins tab Enter the margin size that you want for Left Top Right and Bottom or click Minimum if you want to set the margins to the minimum acceptable for the selected printer From the Units list select the unit to which you want to set the margins Configure other print options To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Header Footer From the Headers Footers tab of the Print Properties dialog you can define the headers and footers that you want to print on every page of the document You can enter the text manually or choose from a list of Insert Codes The list of insert codes are f Full path of document v Document Drive d Document Directory b Document Base name e Document file extension n Total document pages Current page number 283 PRINTING HEADER FOOTER N Total tiled pages P Current tile number
64. for which you want to calculate the mass properties To select multiple parts press the Shift or Control key while selecting 124 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES 2 view the mass properties of the entire 3D model make sure no parts are selected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also make your selection after you open the Entity Prop erties dialog 3 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears 4 Click the Mass Properties tab to view the properties of the selected mass STEP RESULT When a mass property cannot be calculated N A displays in red for that property When this is the case you can also click Error Report for a list of mass properties that could not be calculated 5 Tochange the density change measurement units or configure computation of inertia tensor click Options STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears 6 Click OK to close the Options dialog Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog Configuring Mass Properties From the Mass Properties tab you can change the density the measurement units or configure the reference point of inertia tensor TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properti
65. grouping 266 267 hiding all markups 266 hiding selected markups 266 hyperlink 213 create 213 delete 215 edit 215 open 215 intellistamp 217 add 220 view attributes 221 layers 206 change color 207 create 206 delete 209 moving a markup entity 209 rename 208 set active 207 toggle 208 leader 228 marking up 2D files 211 marking up 3D files 211 Markup Entity Properties dialog 273 arrow style 276 custom color 277 custom line color 274 custom line thickness 275 fill color 277 fill type 276 leader alignment 278 line color 274 line style 274 line thickness 275 markup layers 277 text box visibility 278 Markup file 18 create 201 export 204 import 203 open 202 save 202 203 save view 200 set active 205 view 205 Markup files 200 Markup Filter 199 markup information 201 Markup Navigation Tree 27 198 Markup Panel 27 198 measurement units and symbols 273 moving markups 265 nesting entities 252 264 note 251 263 rotating all markups 265 rotating selected markups 265 selecting markups 264 signoff 216 history 217 re approve 217 rescind 216 stamp 222 stamp library 223 delete 224 text 250 text box visibility 250 transforming markups 265 ungrouping 267 working with markup entities 264 markups intellistamp design 218 mass properties 124 125 Measure Distance 2D non vector 53 measurement units and symbols 273 Missing Resource icon 44 missing resources 44 missing XRef notification icon 109 Mob
66. internal lines visible but including additional silhouette edges These are not true edges but help to visualize the model Wire Polygons A skeletal model constructed of unfilled polygons Shaded Wire An outlined solid model constructed of planes and surfaces The outline is a solid line and the model s surfaces are shaded to increase the illusion of three dimensions 114 WORKING WITH 3D FILES DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES Method Description Reflective A solid model constructed of planes and surfaces These surfaces are have a reflective sheer to accentuate the model s shadows Reflective Wire An outlined solid model constructed of planes and surfaces The outline is a solid line and the model s surfaces have a reflective sheer to the model s shadows Changing the Render Mode To change the render mode of the selected model or model parts perform the following TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Rendering ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Render Mode fJ SrEP REsULT Render mode options are listed 2 Select a render mode from the list STEP REsULT The selected render mode is highlighted RESULT The model or selected model parts change to the selected render mode Changing the Visibility You can choose to show or hide selected parts this can be done from either the Model Tree or the workspace From the Mod
67. is high lighted by a line The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The X Y and Z coordinates for Position 1 and X Y and Z coordinates for Position 2 appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Click and drag the value box anywhere on the markup 260 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 10 11 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring Vertex Coordinates The Vertex Coordinates option provides the coordinates of vertices on the model TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Vertex Coordinate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Vertex Coordi nate 22 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears All vertices on the model are high lighted Scroll over the vertex whose coordinates you want to add to the markup STEP REsULT The X Y and Z coordinates appear in a tooltip Click the vertex STEP REsULT The X Y an Z coordinates and unit appear a value box entity on the current active markup layer and in the Measurement Entities dialog Click and drag the value box anywhere on the markup ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement RESULT Click and drag the frame handles to en
68. keyboard RESULT The hyperlink is deleted 215 Markups MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Adding Signoff Entities The Signoff entity is an approval stamp containing information about the markup author date and time of creation You create a signoff entity when the Markup file is finalized NOTE If a markup is modified after a signoff is created the signoff disappears is rescinded from the workspace but remains in the Markup Navigation tree Double click on the signoff entity in the tree to view the signoff history the person who rescinded the signoff the creation date and the drop date TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Signoff ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff 2 2 Clickand drag to create a box on the drawing where you want the signoff STEP RESULT The Signoff dialog appears displaying details of the signoff 3 Click OK RESULT The signoff entity appears on the drawing and in the tree and displays the author creation date and approval date Rescinding the Signoff You can rescind a signoff on a drawing TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation tree or in the workspace double click the signoff markup entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff A STEP RESULT The Signoff dialog appears 2 Click Rescind RESULT The signoff disappears from the drawing but remains in
69. list select the type of font b From the Size list select the size of font 287 PRINTING ASSIGNING PEN SETTINGS In the Print Properties dialog configure other print properties To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Preview dialog appears 10 Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Assigning Pen Settings From the Pen Settings tab of the Print Properties dialog you can set the thickness of the color indices for the print file NOTE AutoVue uses the default pen color indices of the native document for the vector file being viewed You will not be able to change the color assigned to a pen with AutoVue TASK 1 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print d STEP REsULT The Print Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Pen Settings tab 3 Under From To select the Color Index that you want to assign a new pen thick ness ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To change more than one color indices press the Shift or Control key while selecting 4 From the Units list select the unit of measure that you want to set the thickness Enter the new thickness STEP RESULT The new Thickness appears beside the Color Index 6 Inthe Print Properties dialog configure other print properties Configure other print options 8 To view a partial view of the file click Pa
70. measurement 12 If you selected Shape click the edge of the predefined shape STEPRESULT The shape is highlighted and the area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 13 Click Reset to take another measurement 14 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Angle in non Vector Files Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options Click the Angle tab Select a unit of measurement from the Units list 56 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 4 Click points on the drawing to define the angle you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 5 RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them The angle measurement appears in the Angle tab 5 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Angle in Vector Files Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Angle tab 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the angle between three points 5
71. or browse to locate the file you want to cross probe then click Open Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each additional file that you want to cross probe 6 Click OK STEP RESULT Each file you select appears in a new window A dialog appears for each new window which lets you change the view or page for each file Each dialog has the Auto matic option selected by default When the Automatic option is selected for each dialog you see different behavior depending on the files you cross probe 7 Ifyou cross probe a schematic PCB one window automatically displays a 2D PCB and the other window displays a schematic The same is true if either file contains a PCB and a schematic Whereas if files A and B contain both a schematic and a PCB and they are cross probed one of the files displays the schematic page and the other displays the 2D PCB 8 Ifyou cross probe two PCBs one window automatically displays a 2D and the other window displays a 3D PCB 9 cross probe two schematics both are set to schematic 10 change the view of a file in a window do the following a Deselect the Automatic option in the dialog for the window you want to change b From the Type list select Schematic PCB or PCB 3D View These options are avail able in the Type list only when the views are present in the file STEP RESULT The view of the file changes in the window 81 WORKING WITH EDA FILES PROBING 11
72. parts from the Model Tree or from the workspace to highlight them in the Model Tree and on the model You can also select a model part and have all its iden tical parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree You can also configure the Selection Highlight Select Model Parts from the Workspace TASK 1 Select a part or parts on the model in the workspace ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 Toselect the parent entities of a selected part press the Shift key and select the part again STEP RESULT A pop up appears listing the parent entities of the selected part Select an entity from the pop up list The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree 3 Toselect a group of parts from the Edit menu select Select then click and drag the mouse around the parts RESULT The entities within the box are selected and highlighted in the Model Tree If the selected entity is hidden in the Model Tree the Model Tree expands to display the selected entity Selecting All Identical Parts of a Model Select a model part in the workspace or from the Model Tree Right click and select Select Identical Parts All identical parts are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree If there are no iden tical parts found a message appears indicating No identical parts found You can also select sub assemblies and Select
73. provides several conversion file formats for you Conversion Options From the File menu select Convert to open the Convert dialog Note that depending on the conversion type being performed the dialog options will vary Depending on the conversion type being performed the available options in the Convert dialog will vary These options are Option Description Color Depth Select an option from the list 1 Black and white 4 16 colors 8 256 colors 24 True color auto AutoVue selects the color depth that best matches the original file Convert to Format A list of all the possible types of output file formats currently available for conversion The available formats are Stereolithography Virtual Reality Modelling Language CALS GP4 Encapsulated Postscript Raster HP Laserjet Printer PCL PCX Bitmap Run Length RLC File PDF TIFF Windows Bitmap 293 CONVERSION CONVERTING A 3D MODEL Option Output Description Specify the name and path of the file in which the conversion is to be stored This file is also known as the output file You can use Browse to provide AutoVue with the file s path If writing onto an existing file a warning message appears asking if you want to overwrite the existing file Sub Format The Sub Format list appears when you selected HP Laserjet Print or TIFF from the Convert to Format list Select a sub format from the list The Sub Format list appe
74. reference files Native Custom properties for file types such as last person who saved the file signature verification and author comments DMS If AutoVue is integrated with a backend DMS PLM ERP system a DMS tab appears that lists file attributes retrieved from the backend system NOTE The file properties can vary depending on the file format viewed Viewing File Properties To view file properties TASK 1 From the File menu select Properties STEP RESULT The Properties dialog appears 2 To view the file properties click the File Properties tab 3 view resource information click the Resource Information tab STEP RESULT All included resources are listed in the Resource Information tab If a resource thatis required to fully display the file is missing it is listed with the Missing Resource icon if a resource is found it appears with the Found Resource icon wf If a required resource is missing and AutoVue substitutes it with another resource the Substituted Resources icon appears 32 AUTOVUE OPENING FILES 4 To view native properties click the Native Properties tab 5 Click OK to close the Properties dialog Navigating a Document with Multiple Pages AutoVue provides navigation buttons in the AutoVue toolbar to allow you to flip through a drawing for example Office 2D EDA or 3D files that contains multiple pages The navigation buttons ap
75. select Reset All Part Alignment With the Part Alignment option you can select a point on a model s vertex edge or face to align to another model or model part The Mobile point determines the precise point of alignment for the model part The Fixed point on the model determines the precise fixed point to which the mobile part aligns When aligning models parts you can select from one of the following Constraint Types Option Type Description Constraint Coincident The Mobile part is positioned so that the selected point on the mobile part coincides with the selected part on the Fixed part 132 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PART ALIGNMENT Option Type Parallel Perpendicular Concentric Description Align the Mobile point so that it is parallel to the Fixed point Align the Mobile point so that it is perpendicular to the Fixed point Align the Mobile point so that it has the same center as the Fixed point Part Alignment Constraints The table below lists the available Constraint Types for different combinations of part alignment Point Line Arc Plane Sphere Cylinder Cone Cone Coin Par Per Con Per Con Coin Par Con Coin Con Con Con Par Cylinder Con ParCon ParCon Per Coin Par Con Con Sphere Con Coin Con Coin Coin Con Con Plane Coin Per Coin Par Coin Par Arc Con Per Con Par Con Line Coin Coin Par Point Coin NOTE The letters in the table indica
76. select Add Entity and then select Minimum Distance ADDITIONAL NEORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Minimum Distance as STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Click E set 1 3 From the Snapping Mode section select one of the following Select Entity if you want to measure the distance between model parts Snapping modes are disabled Select Geometry if you want to measure the distance between entity types Snap ping modes are displayed ADDITIONAL INFORMATION See 3D Snapping Modes for more information 4 Ifyou selected Entity select a part or parts on the model If you selected Geom etry select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONALINFORMATION To reset a set click Clear To clear items from a set select the items and press the Delete key To deselect a part or entity type on the model press the Control key and left click the part or entity type STEP RESULT The model parts appear in the list under Set 1 and are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree All entities of the selected entity type are highlighted on the model 5 Click M Set 2 6 Repeat step 3 and 4 STEP RESULT The model part appears in the list under Set 2 7 Fromthe Measured Min Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 8 Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set
77. select the point where you want the UCS axes to appear 6 Click Apply 7 Clickthe Orientation tab to define the orientation of the UCS 8 From the Define From list select the point where you want to orient the UCS 9 Click Apply 10 Tohide the UCS axes on the model deselect the Show Trihedron check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This option is selected by default 11 Click OK to close the User Coordinate Systems dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there is more than one coordinate system for this file select which coordinate system the new UCS will be relative to from the Relative To list Other wise the new UCS is calculated with respect to the World Coordinate System RESULT The newly active trihedral coordinate system appears bolder and larger See Modifying a User Defined Coordinate System Activating a Coordinate System Interference Checks You can check for spatial interference of any two model parts 148 WORKING WITH 3D FILES INTERFERENCE CHECKS Interference Check Options With the Interference Checking option you can perform different interference checks These checks are Check Description All Against All Check for interference of any of the parts in the model Set Against the Rest Check where a model part or set of model parts interfere with other model parts Set Against Itself Check where a model part or set of model parts interfere with itself Set 1 Against Set 2 Chec
78. specify the UCS orientation according to one or more of the three axes 145 WORKING WITH 3D FILES USER DEFINED COORDINATE SYSTEMS Position Edge Tangent Description If selected all edges are highlighted on the model A snap box appears when you move the cursor near an edge First select the axis that will determine the UCS orientation Click at a point on an edge to define the orientation The x y and z values for the edge point are displayed The UCS axes are reoriented to the selected edge Face Normal If selected when you move the cursor along a model face the face is highlighted First select the axis that will determine the UCS orientation Click at a point on an face to define the orientation The x y and z values for the face point are displayed The UCS axes are reoriented to the selected face 2 Vertices If selected all vertices are highlighted on the model A snap box appears when you move the cursor on a vertex First select the axis that will determine the UCS orientation Click two vertex points to define the orientation The x y and z values for the vertices are displayed The UCS axes are reoriented to the selected vertices 3 Vertices If selected all vertices are highlighted on the model A snap box appears when you move the cursor on a vertex First select the axis that will determine the UCS orientation Click three vertex points to define the orientation The x y and z
79. steps 1 to 5 316 REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION Opening a Markup While Initiating a Session TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Start Collaboration Session STEP RESULT The Initiate Session dialog appears Click Browse STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears In the Select Markup File s list select the check box beside the Markup that you want to open To import a Markup file click Import STEP RESULT The Select markup file to import dialog appears Locate the file that you want to open Click Open Click OK in the Markup Files dialog In the Initiate Session dialog select Session Markup if you want to open a Session Markup and keep the layer colors and markup entities from the Collaboration Session Click OK RESULT The selected Markup appears in the Initiate Session dialog Opening a Markup During a Session The Host can open Markups during a Collaboration Session These Markups can be session markups created during Collaboration Sessions or any non session Markup files TASK 1 During a Collaboration Session from the Markup menu select Open STEP RESULT A confirmation dialog appears prompting you to save the current Session Markup Click Yes or No or Cancel STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears Select the check box beside the Markup that you want to open To import a Markup file click Import STEP RESULT The Select Marku
80. the Markup Navigation Tree 216 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Re Approving a Signoff To re approve the signoff that has been rescinded TASK 1 In the tree double click the signoff markup entity The Signoff dialog appears 2 Click Approve RESULT The signoff entity re appears on the drawing and the tree Viewing the History of a Signoff TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Signoff ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff gt 2 Click History STEP RESULT The Signoff History dialog appears displaying the author date and time the signoff was created 3 Click Cancel to close the Signoff dialog Creating an Intellistamp The Intellistamp markup entity lets you create a stamp that includes document and user information metadata pulled directly from the backend DMS ERP PLM UCM system See Also AutoVue Mobile Designing an Intellistamp To design an Intellistamp you must use the Design Stamp tool that is included with the AutoVue installation To launch the tool go to the lt AutoVue installation Win folder and double click stampdlg exe 217 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES The Design Stamp dialog appears Design Stamp Stamp Name Example Add Cancel Traditional Stamp Remove mage File dmStamp1 bmp Browse Font Attributes Remove 0 0427138 10 1258741
81. to locate the directory where the external font files are located ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To browse all subdirectories below the current path type two asterisks at the end of the file path For example C samples will result in browsing all subdirectories below samples To browse one subdirectory below the current path type one asterisk at the end of the file path For example C samples will result in browsing one subdirectory below samples 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more than one path to the list repeat steps 3 to 5 STEP REsULT The directory path appears 5 Tochange the order select the path you want to move then click Up or Down to move the path to where you wantit in the list 6 To remove a path select the path and click Remove STEP RESULT The selected path disappears from the list 7 Click OK to close the Configuration dialog Measurement The Measurement options let you define the default measurement units and the number of decimal places 181 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS From the Configuration tree expand General and then select Measurement to display the options you need The available options are as follows Option Description Decimal Digits Lets you specify the number of decimal digits displayed for each measurement Enter a number from 1 to 18 Default File Units Lets you specify the units to use for drawings when the drawings do no
82. to measure the angle of the arc 5 Click points on the drawing to define the arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordi nates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Arc tab 6 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Arc in Vector Files Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius center arc length start and end of angle sweep and diameter TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Arc tab 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snap ping modes are displayed 4 the snapping modes that you want to select as the points for the measure ment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To clear all snapping modes click All Off See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more information 5 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc 58 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 10 From the Arc Info Unit list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance From the Measure Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle If you selected From 3 Points clic
83. to rotate the model by the selected axis ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to rotate the selection freely as done in Rotate Mode press the Control key during rotation 6 exit Manipulate mode click Manipulate 45 or from the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All 131 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PART ALIGNMENT Scaling a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Manipulate STEP RESULT You are now in Manipulate mode Select the model part or parts that you want to scale ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT A model size representation of the Global Axes appears through the model part or parts and are encased by a three dimensional box Click and drag a corner cube of the box up or down to scale the selected model part To exit Manipulate mode click Manipulate 55 or from the Manipulate menu select Manipulate RESULT To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Trans form and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model
84. to the selected PMI item 128 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PMI ENTITIES PMI Configuration Entities The Views Captures Reference Grouping entities refer to specific configurations of the model These PMI configuration entities are listed in the Model Tree and are activated by right clicking the entity and then selecting Activate Views The View configuration entity displays predefined views and highlights associated PMI entities TASK 1 Expand the Views tree to display the defined views 2 Right click the selected view and then select Activate RESULT The model and PMI entities display in the workspace as defined in the selected view The PMI entities are also highlighted in the Model Tree Captures The Captures configuration entity displays predefined views TASK 1 Expand the Captures tree to display the defined captures 2 Right click the selected captures and then select Activate RESULT The model and PMI entities display in the workspace as defined in the selected capture Reference Frames The Reference Frames configuration entity highlights the grouped PMI entities TASK 1 Expand the Reference Frames tree to display the predefined reference frames 2 Right click the selected reference frame and then select Activate RESULT The grouped PMI entities are highlighted in the Model Tree 129 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING A 3D MODEL PMI Hyperlinks PMI entiti
85. view its description ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to restart a new check Click Close to close the Verify Design dialog Exporting the Design Verification Results You can export the design verification results into a text file TASK 1 2 Verify the design In the Verify Design dialog click Export STEP RESULT The Export Results dialog appears Navigate and select the directory where you want to export the results Enter a file name 91 WORKING WITH EDA FILES SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEARCH 5 Click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the design verification results in a txt text or a csv Comma Separated Values file listing each violation result and its description 6 Click Close to close the Verify Design dialog Searching Using Entity Search You can search for an entity in a schematic drawing or a PCB design using the Entity Search option To filter entities apply attribute or entity type filters as search criteria You can select entities from the results list to highlight them in the workspace and the Navigation Panel You can also export the search results to a csv file NOTE If the selected entity is small a flash box appears indicating the location of the high lighted entity in the workspace To open the Entity Search dialog from the Edit menu select Entity Search From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search 4 If your schematic has multiple pages a Def
86. workspace See Filtering Entity Types When you hover the mouse over an entity in the workspace a tooltip with information about the entity s attributes appears The tooltip displays whether or not you select the entity 66 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ZOOMING TO A SELECTED ENTITY From the Entity Search Dialog To select and entity from the Entity Search dialog perform the following steps TASK 1 Perform an attribute based or entity type based search using the Entity Search dialog 2 Select an entity or entities from the Entity Types list or the Attributes list of the Entity Search dialog To select more than one entity press the Shift or Control key while selecting RESULT The selected entity or entities appear highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel If the selected entity is too small a flash box appears indicating the location of the high lighted entity in the workspace See Searching Using Entity Search Zooming to a Selected Entity To zoom to a selected entity perform the following steps TASK 1 If you selected an entity from the workspace or Navigation panel right click and select Zoom Selected 2 Ifyou selected an entity from the Entity Search dialog right click and select Zoom Selected RESULT AutoVue zooms to the selected entity in the workspace 67 WORKING WITH EDA FILES FILTERING ENTITY TYPES Filtering Entity Types With the Entit
87. you can specify the minimum and maximum dimen sions an entity must be between Location specifies an axes aligned boundary box you can specify the dimensions for an axes aligned boundary box that an entity must be inside TASK 1 From the Entity Search dialog click the Advanced 3D Search tab Entity Search 3D Search Advanced 3D Search Volume C Enabled Minimum Dimensions Maximum Dimensions X Yi i Location C Enabled Point 1 Point 2 2 search for entities by Volume select the Enabled check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to search for entities that match all three dimensions select the Completely contained check box If the check box is deselected then an entity only has to match one dimension in order to appear in the Results list Enter the minimum and maximum dimensions in their respective fields 4 From the Units list select the unit you want to set for the Volume dimensions To search for entities by location select the Enabled check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to search for entities that match all three dimensions select the Fits completely check box If the check box is deselected then an entity only has to match one dimension to appear in the Results list 6 From the Units list select the unit you want to set for the Location dimensions Enter the dimensions for Point 1 and Point 2 8 Click the 3D Search tab 161 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D
88. 0 Click OK to close the Compare Results dialog 11 Toexit Compare mode from the File menu select Exit Compare ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Exit Compare RESULT The base file appears in the workspace Comparing Entity Sets From the file comparison you can compare a set of entities from one file against a set of entities from the another file You can also compare sets of entities from the same file TASK 1 Select the files you want to compare 153 WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES 4 From the Analysis menu select Compare Sets Compare Sets STEP RESULT The Compare Sets dialog appears amp 3DCatiaFrontDrive amp ssembly CATE A Page 1 5 Producti 5 3DCatiabB alanceShafl 2 3DCatia5B alancet Solid 3DCatiabPowerSteerin 3DCatiabPowerSte S 3DCatiaBACPulley CAT Part Page 1 3DCatia amp ACPulley CAT Par Solid B Annotation Set 1 Datums Simple D atum Datum Target Solid Dimensions Mj Click Ef Set 1 Select the entities from either the tree on the left or the tree on the right ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The tree on the left is the base file and the tree on the right is the compare file STEP RESULT The selected entities appear in the Set 1 list Click BY Set 2 Select the entities from the other tree that you did not select for Set 1 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To co
89. 18 Inviting Users During a Session 318 Removing Users from a Session ssssesssssssssssesssscssssssssecsncessssscsucsnscsucsuceaccsscsscssscsscsnceaceasesscesseaseens 319 Assigning a Host During a SESSION 319 Passing Control of a Session to Another User eee eese tentent testen 320 Savihg a SESSION Mal Kip i e Oe QR RR opa GR eh DOR LR rta RE OB DR REPARARE 320 Closinga SESSION o osos co SO mmm at E RES 321 Requesting Control of a Session sessesssssssssessssssessscsscsssssscsssssessussascsssescssscsesuscsscsnceacsuscsscsnsesscanees 321 Tracking Changes e tuse ask ibam Ebr 321 Unlockitig a VIEW nier n re ger n RH oder ENERE 322 NT IIR 322 VIEWING SessioridDtortfidtlODis ssepe CUERO OM UE REM BO poda dv M SUR Rn RU D RS 323 A Sess LY secet beide to uode CASE dS 323 siete te patte uet e 323 Sending a Message to Selected Users eene tentent ste ttnttatta tto tts statis 324 Sending a Message to All USL cesessssssssseesscsnssssssscssscsessncssscssssscssscsscsuscascsuccaccssceecsaseaesnceacensesees 324 AutoVue in Offline Mode cts ea o pea de ui eda as cede oae pedea poe deer 327 Managing Offline da Ode P ce d eee E B Dea gu 327 Working in Offline scuto ERE R
90. ASURE ENTITIES Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities When marking up 2D vector files in addition to all the markup options available for 2D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode Measure options vary between vector and non vector files For vector files AutoVue provides the option to snap to fixed points on the drawing For non vector files you can only free snap When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized hidden or deleted You can also modify the font of a measure entity align a free snap measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis as well as add units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the drawing NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel In Markup mode you can choose from several measure options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options Option Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 4 Arc Measure an arc entity From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc a Area Measure a selected area From the Markup Entity t
91. DER FOOTER Configure the font then click OK In the Print Properties dialog configure other print properties To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Adding a Header and Footer In the Headers Footers tab you can manually enter text or choose from a list of Insert Codes to appear in the headers and footers You can also print system variables TASK 1 OND 11 12 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Click the Headers Footers tab Click in the Left Center or Right field and enter the text that you want to appear in the header and footer or choose an Insert Code or Insert Variable To Insert Code in the header or footer click Left Center or Right then select a code from the list To Insert Variable in the header or footer click Left Center or Right then select a variable from the list To change the Font click Set Font The Font dialog appears From the Font list select the type of font From the Size list select the size of font To set the font Style click Bold or Italic or both then click OK In the Print Properties dialog configure other print properties To view a partial view of the file click
92. ESULT The Value list appears corresponding to the selected attribute 6 Select the Any Value check box if you want to search by any value the associated value options are disabled 7 Deselect the Any Value check box if you want to search by a specific value from the Condition set condition for the search and from the Values list select the values that you want to search 8 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more than one Attribute Filter repeat steps 4 to 8 9 To edit an Attribute Filter select the filter and click Edit STEP RESULT The Attribute Filter dialog appears allowing you to edit the filter 10 Todisable an Attribute Filter deselect the check box beside the filter or filters that you want to disable 11 To enable an Attribute Filter select the check box beside the filter or filters 12 To remove an Attribute Filter in the Entity Search dialog select the filter and click Remove STEP RESULT The Attribute Filter disappears from the list 13 Inthe Entity Search dialog click Search STEP RESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear in the Results list displaying the name and type of the entities 14 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog 160 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PERFORMING AN ADVANCED 3D SEARCH Performing an Advanced 3D Search From the Entity Search dialog you can search for entities using volume or location filters Volume specifies the size of the entity
93. EUS DM UR FRU NOD D EDAD t pd DADA 328 Opening Offlirie aac a re seal vue E asa teeter Mn RI ER tus 329 Removing Offline Files from AutoVue eese 329 Synchronizing Files in Offline 330 Going Back id edo ran deatur ta i tents a URN EORR EO tAR HR E E 330 Appendix A EDA Terms and Definitions oboe ond UNE UR REOR CORDE RR RE QN 331 gie M tu RE 345 Feedb36lo ania ED SUD OE E DM e tef cs 353 GerieralAnqulries e pcd rui 353 Sales Inquilies uec sott dro OR den arte air RU rol c d ds tae A UK 353 Gustomier 354 Preface The Oracle AutoVue User Manual explores AutoVue s key capabilities and is designed to help you get the most out of AutoVue s extensive functionality Audience This manual is intended for Oracle AutoVue end users Document Accessibility Our goal is to make Oracle products services and supporting documentation accessible to all users including users that are disabled To that end our documentation includes features that make information available to users of as
94. Entity Search dialog 69 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Right click and select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also double click the entity in the workspace to view its entity information STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog displays the selected entity and its associated entity Select any associated entity in the tree to display its attributes To view all associated entities for any given entity in the tree select the entity and click Expand ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To view the entity properties for the previous entity click the back arrow lt To return to the entity properties displayed before you clicked the back arrow click the forward arrow gt Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog Showing Net Connectivity You can view the net connectivity of an entity such as a pin via or trace with the Show Net Connectivity option NOTE Show Net Connectivity is disabled when more than one entity is selected TASK 1 Select an entity such as a pin or trace from the workspace the Navigation Panel STEP RESULT The corresponding entity is highlighted in the workspace and in the Naviga tion Panel 2 From the workspace or Navigation Panel right click the selected entity and then select Show Net Connectivity RESULT The graphical entities belonging to the connected nets are highlighted Displaying the Entity Properties of a N
95. From the tree expand EDA and then select Analysis 2 Select the Layer Settings option to synchronize all layer settings when comparing files RESULT NOTE This option is only applicable for PCB drawings 192 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing You can configure the zoom options when you cross probe files TASK 1 From the tree expand EDA and then select Analysis 2 Select one of the following Cross Probe options a Select Keep Current Zoom Level When this option is active the view of the target files remains the same while you cross probe b Select Zoom Selected to automatically zoom in on selected entities while you cross probe This option is enabled by default c Select Zoom Fit to automatically adjust the contents of a file along the horizontal or vertical axis to fully display within the current window Modifying Colors Common You can configure the colors for EDA files From the tree expand EDA and then select Colors In the Color Options dialog the options that you can configure are grouped under Common and 3D View as follows Option Description Background Set the background color for 3D view Selection Set the color when selecting a model or model parts Entity Default Set the default color to use when the model color is not stored in the native file Measurement Set the color for measuremen
96. GURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES Modifying 3D View You can configure the board thickness and component height for the 3D PCB view of EDA files Note that these Board Thickness and Component Height values are used only if the underlying EDA file does not contain board thickness and component height information TASK 1 From the Configuration tree select EDA 2 Entera value in the Default Board Thickness field to change the board s thick ness ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Default Board Thickness option only affects boards that have no board thickness defined in the design If a board has a defined thickness this option does not affect that board 3 Entera value in the Default Component Height field to change the component height ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Default Component Height option affects components that do not have height defined in the design If a component has a defined height this option does not affect that component 4 Towork with a differentunit of measurement select another unit from the Default Units list Thisisthe unit of measurement used for values set in the Default Board Thickness and Default Component Height fields 5 Reload the file to see your changes Synchronizing Layers when Comparing Files When you compare files you can synchronize all layer settings When the layer settings are synchronized changing one setting changes the same setting for both files you are comparing TASK 1
97. Hidden Default Value lt Not Defined gt X Preview Zoom In The following sections describe how to design an Intellistamp with the Design Stamp tool TASK 1 From the Stamp Name section click Add STEP RESULT The Add New Stamp dialog appears 2 Entera name for the Intellistamp and then click OK STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears 3 Select a background image for the Intellistamp and then click Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To changethe background image once the Intellistamp is created click Browse and then select a new background STEP RESULT The selected image appears in the Preview window of the Design Stamp dialog The Image File field displays the image file path 4 Tosetthe selected Intellistamp as read only select the Traditional Stamp check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Traditional Stamp retains the same attributes size position and so on as defined when the intellistamp is created 5 Toremovean Intellistamp from the Stamp Name box select an Intellistamp and then click Remove 218 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 To add an attribute click Add STEP RESULT The Add New Attribute dialog appears In the Name field enter an attribute name that is defined in the backend system From the Default Value box select one of the following values lt Not Defined gt The attribute retains the same value as defined in the bac
98. IES Formatting Markup Entity Properties With AutoVue you can modify the formatting of a markup entity via the Format option from the Markup menu or via the Markup Entity Properties dialog See Using the Markup Entity Properties Dialog When creating a markup entity you have the option to change the line color line style line thickness arrow style fill color and fill type Additionally you can assign the markup entity the same color as the layer Changing Line Color TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line color 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Color ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Color Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Color STEP RESULT The Line Color dialog appears 3 From the Line Color list select the color that you want for the entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer amp changes the markup entity color to the color of the layer 4 Todefine a custom line color from the Line Color list select Custom Color From the Color dialog that appears select a color and click OK 6 Click OK to close the Line Color dialog RESULT The line color changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE Any new entities that you create will have the new line color 268 MARK
99. INFORMATION An active markup displays in bold in the Markup Navigation Tree 4 Click OK RESULT The selected markups appear in the AutoVue workspace Changing the Active Markup File When you have multiple Markup files open you can change the active markup NOTE An active markup displays in bold in the Markup Navigation Tree Take one of the following steps In the tree right click the name of the Markup file you want to make active then select Set Active From the Markup toolbar you can set the active markup by selecting a markup from the list on the Markup Properties toolbar Take the following steps From the Markup menu select Set Active The Set Active Markup dialog appears From the Select Active Markup list select the markup you want to make active Click OK to make the selected Markup file active 205 Markups WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS Working with Markup Layers Markup files can be divided into layers with each layer having its own unique name You can create name and color layers to organize your work For example different colors can indicate time priorities and each layer can contain markups with a common purpose When working with markup layers you can view layers individually or in combination add rename or delete layers You can also specify a different color for each layer NOTE The default layer color is red See Also Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer Creating a Marku
100. Identical Parts to display all identical sub assemblies 106 WORKING WITH 3D FILES RE CENTERING Re Centering The Re center option repositions the model back to the center of the View window You can use a model part as a central reference point to reposition a model You can select several model parts to use as one collective central reference point Re Centering a Model to a Selected Model Part TASK 1 Select the model part or parts that you want to re center 2 From the View menu select Re Center and then select Selected RESULT The model is repositioned using the selected model part or parts as the central reference point The Selected option is only available when one or more model parts are selected Re Center All The Re Center All option repositions the entire model back to the center of the AutoVue workspace TASK 1 From the View menu select Re Center and then select All STEP RESULT The model is repositioned to the center of the workspace Entity Reference You can use an entity as a central reference point to reposition a model The entities are as follows Entity Description Vertex All vertices are highlighted Select a vertex to use as the central reference point A snap box appears when moving the mouse over a vertex 107 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MODEL TREE Entity Edge Description All edges are highlighted Select an edge to use as the central refe
101. MEASURE ENTITIES 6 Ifyou selected From Points click three points on the drawing to define the angle If you selected Between 2 lines click two lines on the drawing to define the angle STEP REsULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them 7 Clickagain to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurement appears in the Measurement Enti ties dialog 8 To change the size of the arc click and drag it to the desired size 9 move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the markup 10 Toresize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 11 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring an Arc Use Arc option to measure the precise radius length and angles of any arc on the model It also calculates the center point location TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Are STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc STEP RESULT All arc and circles are highlighted on the model Snapping modes are disabled 3 Select From Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snap ping modes a
102. Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Minimum Distance 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Click First Set to select the entities that you want to measure from 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you select Net you cannot select any other type of entity 4 Clickthe first set of entities on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To clear the last set of entities you selected click Clear Set STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted Click Second Set to select the entities that you want to measure to 6 Click the second set of entities on the drawing STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted in a different color 7 Fromthe Measured Min Distance list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 8 Select Zoom to Result if you want to zoom in on the measured value on the drawing 9 Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is high lighted by a line The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurement Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 10 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 11 Toresize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurem
103. Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Freestyle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Freestyle we Click a point on the drawing where you want to start the Freestyle entity Move the cursor to create the Freestyle entity Right click to end the Freestyle entity Creating a Non Contiguous Freestyle Entity TASK 1 wi FW From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Freestyle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Freestyle De Click a point on the drawing where you want to start the Freestyle entity Move the cursor to create the Freestyle entity Click a point on the drawing where you want to interrupt the Freestyle entity Click another point on the drawing where you want to restart the Freestyle entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can interrupt the Freestyle entity as many times as you like by repeating steps 4 and 5 Right click to end the Freestyle entity 227 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes A line segment drawn with the Free Snap snapping mod can be forced to align with the closer horizontal or verticl axis You can also take an existing line segment and have it align with the closer axis The types of line segments that you can align are lines line segments of leaders and polylines and measure entities See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more i
104. N From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Explode i STEP RESULT The Explode dialog appears 2 Select the parts that you want to explode ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting To explode the entire model ensure that no parts are selected 3 From the Maximum Depth list select the level to which you want the model to explode 4 Select Animated if you want to see an animated view of the explosion ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This option is selected by default 5 Select Show Arrows if you want to display the arrows 6 To explode the model click STEP RESULT The whole model or the select model parts explode 7 Toimplode the model click ADDITIONAL INFORMATION manually change the explosion state click and drag the scroll bar 8 Click OK to close the Explode dialog RESULT The explode state remains displayed and the Transformation column 48 in the Model Tree is updated indicating the exploded parts See Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model 143 WORKING WITH 3D FILES USER DEFINED COORDINATE SYSTEMS Saving an Exploded View of a 3D Model From the Explode dialog you can save the exploded view of the 3D model TASK 1 Explode a 3D Model 2 Click Save View in the Explode dialog STEP RESULT The Add User Defined View dialog appears Enter a view name 4 Click OK STEP RESULT The view is saved and appear
105. NFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print dm STEP REsULT The Print Properties dialog appears Configure the print properties To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP REsULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Batch Printing With the Batch Print option you can send a list of files to print at the same time You can also generate a batch by simultaneously opening all the files included in the batch print TASK 1 From the File menu select Batch Print STEP RESULT The Batch Print dialog appears To add a file to be printed click Add STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to locate the file or files that you want to add then Click Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more files to the list repeat steps 2 to 4 To remove a file s select the file from the List of files to be printed and click Remove STEP RESULT The files appear in the List of files to be printed Click OK in the Batch Print dialog STEP REsULT The Print Properties dialog appears Configure the print properties Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing 291 PRINTING BATCH PRINTING 292 Conversion Sometimes you need to convert a file to be able to use it with an application it was not created from AutoVue
106. ON To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT Angle arms appears indicating the angle The measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 8 Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring an Arc Use the Arcoption to measure the precise radius length and angles of any arc on the model It also calculates the center point location TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Are STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc STEP RESULT All arc and circles are highlighted on the model Snapping modes are disabled 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snap ping modes are displayed 258 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 10 11 12 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model From the Dist Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc distance From the Angles Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle If you selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc If you selected Arc Entity click the edge of an arc STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted Click to complete the
107. Oracle AutoVue 20 0 0 User s Manual ORACLE Copyright 1999 2010 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved Portions of this software Copyright 1996 2007 Glyph amp Cog LLC Portions of this software Copyright Unisearch Ltd Australia Portions of this software are owned by Siemens PLM 1986 2008 All rights reserved This software uses ACIS software by Spatial Technology Inc ACIS Copyright 1994 1999 Spatial Technology Inc All rights reserved Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U S Govern ment t
108. P RESULT The Custom Thickness dialog appears 4 Inthe Line Thickness field enter an integer value in pixels Click OK to close the Custom Thickness dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line thickness 269 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Changing Arrow Style AutoVue gives you the option to add an arrow head to certain markup entities For example you can change the arrow style of the line polyline arc freestyle and polygon markup entities TASK 1 Select the markup line entity or entities for which you want to change the arrow style 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Arrow Style Select the new arrow style from the options provided RESULT The arrow style changes for the selected markup line entity or entities NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Arrow Style 5 Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Arrow Style NOTE Any new entities that you create will have the new arrow style Changing Fill Type TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the fill type 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Fill Type ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Fill Type Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navi
109. P REsULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 2 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring Area Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Area ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area 22 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points on a drawing Snapping modes are displayed 245 Markups CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 10
110. Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Preview dialog appears Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing 285 PRINTING WATERMARKS Native Print Settings You can choose to include predefined headers and footers when printing an Excel file from AutoVue TASK 1 From the Print Properties dialog click the Headers Footers tab 2 Under Headers and Footers click inside the Left Center and Right boxes corre sponding to the header or footer position in the original file Select F Native Print Settings Excel from the Insert Code list 4 Click OK to print RESULT The Excel file s headers and footers are printed Watermarks From the Watermark tab of the Print Properties dialog you can specify a watermark that will appear on a printed file When printing a watermark it appears transparent on the file contents You can choose a horizontally or vertically oriented watermark In addition to entering text you can e set the type size and style of font insert Watermark information print system variables To insert Watermark information AutoVue provides a list of codes that you can choose from These codes are 96f Full path of document v Document Drive 96d Document Directory b Document Base name 96e Document file extension Total document pages p Current page number 286 PRINTING WATERMARKS N To
111. R ARE 267 Formatting Markup Entity 268 A Qro o S RR RR MU 268 Changingibitie Styles pits rd it aS Rede oua UN UEM No A 269 Chandgitig Linie Thickness uu scope ym pet oer io eld adco 269 Changing ANOW SEV Tes src ota E Rone er oper Tey t eov aad uM Oe 270 Changing 270 Changing Cate qd bu t tx i dq 271 Assigning a Markup Entity the Same Color as the Layer sse 271 Chanig Penta oem inde iride er dA eu e Reni ER Eee 272 Changing Measurement Units and 5 6 273 Using the Markup Entity Properties 273 ee tet 279 RN RN RINE RN 279 Configuring the Print ODEIORS rt ro cr pli de i ket eti s 282 Print Margin ascia er oT ata cuu o e Cue 282 Setting the Margins Dee on od eA du 283 Header uci a pU sd UU esd tet Gauche up a REN 283 Adding a Hea
112. STEP RESULT entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 7 model select the entity you want to measure to RESULT The distance from the first set of entities to the second set is highlighted by a line The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and Delta Z appear in the Measurement dialog Addi tionally the coordinates for the center point of each entity displays in the From and To fields To take another measurement click Reset Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP REsULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab 166 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring Minimum Distance With the Minimum Distance option you can measure the minimum distance between model parts as well as any two points from the selection sets vertices edges mid edges arc axes arc centers faces or any combination of
113. Select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section Logical layers associated with the selected physical layer are also selected When you make changes to a selected physical layer the logical layers associated with it are also affected Select one or multiple logical layers from the Logical Layers section To select multiple logical layers press the Shift or Control key while selecting 4 Click one of the following buttons Click Bring to Front to move all selected layers to the front in the workspace In the Logical Layers section these layers move to the top of the list Click Up to move selected layers up one layer Click Down to move selected layers down one layer ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also drag and drop selected logical layers in the Logical Layers section 5 Click Apply to see the changes in the workspace STEP RESULT The file now displays according to the layer scheme you arranged Also logical layers are renumbered in the Order column of Logical Layers section 6 Youcan now save your changes as a user defined layer set 7 Click Close to close the Layers dialog Modifying Visibility for Physical Layers Use the Layers dialog to hide or display specific physical layers in the workspace TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 55 STEP RESULT The Layers dialog op
114. Signoff Creates an approval stamp containing information about the markup author date and time of creation From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff gt See Adding Signoff Entities Stamp Adds a stamp markup to the document From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Stamp See Adding a Stamp 211 Markups MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Adding an Attachment In AutoVue you can attach a file of any type for example text audio or video as a markup entity The attachment is embedded into the markup entity and displays as an icon the display TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Attachment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment S 2 Clickon the drawing where you want to add an attachment STEP RESULT The Attach File dialog appears 3 Inthe Link Name field enter a name for the attachment Optionally you can also provide a brief description of the attachment in the Description box 4 Inthe URL field enter the path to the file or click Browse The File Open dialog appears 5 Selectthe file or click Browse and click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can attach any local file or any DMS file 6 From the Open In list select one the following A new applet window Opens the attachment in a new AutoVue window Current applet window Opens the attachment in the current AutoVu
115. Systems dialog RESULT If you modified the position or orientation the UCS axes dynamically move to the new position A change in Show Trihedron option will make the UCS axes appear or disap pear accordingly Additionally a name change will display the new name in the Coordinate Systems list Activating a Coordinate System When you set a User Defined Coordinate System UCS as the active axes operations such as measuring transforming a model or defining a view point are applied with respect to these axes TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Set User Coordinate System STEP RESULT The User Coordinate Systems dialog appears From the Coordinate System list select the trihedral coordinate system that you want to use Click Set Active Click OK to close the User Coordinate Systems dialog RESULT The newly active trihedral coordinate system appears bolder and larger on the model 147 WORKING WITH 3D FILES INTERFERENCE CHECKS Defining a User Coordinate System TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Set User Coordinate System STEP RESULT The User Coordinate Systems dialog appears 2 Click New STEP RESULT The name of the User Defined Coordinate System UCS1 for the first one appears in the Coordinate Systems list 3 To change the name that you want for the UCS in the Name field enter a new name 4 Click the Position tab to define the origin of the UCS 5 Fromthe Define From list
116. TION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment or Hyperlink 3e RESULT In the Markup Tree the selected markup entity appears as a child of the Text parent entity Working with Markup Entities With AutoVue you can assign a markup entity its own color the same color as the current active layer or a custom color You also have the option of grouping markup entities When you group markup entities you can manage the group as you would a single entity In Markup mode there are several options for modifying an entity You can apply these options to selected pre existing entities or to new entities that you add NOTE You can edit certain markup entities after they have been created To do so in the Markup Navigation Tree right click the markup entity and then select Edit Go To a Markup Entity Go To restores the view state to when an entity was first created Opening an existing Markup file also restores the last saved view state From the Markup Navigation Tree right click the markup entity that you want to view and select Go To AutoVue displays the markup page containing the entity If you selected a markup entity that is on another page of the Markup file the page containing that entity will be displayed Selecting Markup Entities To select a markup entity click the markup entity s outer edge To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting The markup entity or
117. ULT A list of attributes for the selected entity type appear If you want to search by attribute select an attribute from the Attribute list If you want to search by value select a value from the Value list Click Add Filter STEP REsULT The selected attribute and its corresponding value appear in the list Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have all the filters you want 93 WORKING WITH EDA FILES SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEARCH 8 Click Apply Filter s ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To remove a filter select the line in the list containing the attribute and value you do not want to use as a filter then click Remove Filter STEP RESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear showing the column headers for the entity s available attributes 9 Tosavethe results click Export Result STEP RESULT The Save dialog appears 10 Specify the file name and the directory where you want to store the file then click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values file 11 Toviewthe properties of an entity select the entity from the Entity Types list or the Attributes list then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP REsULT The Entities Properties dialog appears and displays the properties for the selected entity 12 Toshow the net connectivity click the Attributes tab select the entity from the list then right click and select Show Net Connectivity STEP REsULT The ne
118. UPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Changing Line Style The current line style is highlighted in the Line Style option TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line style 2 From Markup menu select Format and then select Line Style Select the new line style from the options provided RESULT The line style changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Style zzz Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Style NOTE Any new entities that you create will have the new line style Changing Line Thickness The current line thickness is highlighted in the Line Thickness option TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line thick ness 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Thickness Select the new line thickness from the options provided The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Thick ness zz Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Thickness 3 Todefine a custom line thickness from the Markup menu select Format select Line Thickness and then select Customize STE
119. Use PMI Filtering to select which types of product and manufacturing information to display TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select PMI Filtering ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click PMI Filtering STEP RESULT The PMI Filtering dialog appears and displays all PMI types 2 Inthe Tree column select the check box beside the items that you want to display in the Model Tree 3 Inthe View column select the check box beside the items that you want to display on the 3D model 4 Deselect the check box beside the items that you want to hide ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click All to show all items or click None to hide all items 5 Click OK to close the PMI Filtering dialog RESULT Only items selected in the Tree column are displayed in the Model Tree Only items selected in the View column are visible on the 3D model Visibility settings are saved and will be restored the next time you open the PMI filtering dialog NOTE AutoVue supports default PMI visibility as saved in the file To restore default PMI visibility click Default in the PMI Filtering dialog Aligning to a PMI Entity From the Model Tree right click the PMI item that you want to align to and select Align To AutoVue aligns to the selected PMI item Go to a Displayed PMI Entity From the Model Tree right click the PMI item that you want to go to on the model and select Go To AutoVue zooms
120. Vue Office AutoVue 20 AutoVue 3D Professional AutoVue EDA AutoVue Electro Mechanical Professional Advanced Professional Professional Bill of Material BOM x x Blocks 5 Design Hierarchy Navigation x x Design Verification EDA Layers x x Entity Filters Entity Properties x x Entity Search x Entity Selection x Go to Net Instance x x Layer Sets x EDA Measurement Entity Snapping x x Angle Arc Calibration x x Distance x x Minimum Distance Layer State Propagation x 340 APPENDIX B AUTOVUE PRODUCT VARIATIONS FEATURE MATRIX 3 D Features AutoVue 2D AutoVue 3D Professional AutoVue EDA AutoVue Electro Mechanical peace Professional Advanced Professional Professional Basic 3 D Manipulation 3 D Render Modes x Change Part Color x x x Change Transparency x x x Free Rotate x x Expand Collapse Tree x x Identical Part Detection x x Light Settings x x Manipulators x x Re center x x Selection x Spin x x Advanced 3 D Manipulation 3 D Digital Mockup x x Text Search in 3 D x x x 3 D Entity Properties x x x Bill of Material BOM x Electro Mechanical Digital Explode x x Interference Checks x x Part Alignment x x PMI Filtering
121. When comparing 3D files in a non integrated environment we recommend that you use Universal Naming Convention UNC file names or the server protocol so as to ensure that all required sub assemblies and parts are retrieved from correct paths For information on 151 WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES UNC file names and the server protocol refer to the Installation and Administration Manual AutoVue provides the ability to compare two 3D files or two sets of entities from the same file or different files and display color coded comparative data When you compare two files AutoVue displays a Compare Tree and three windows the first containing the base file the second containing the file you compared the base against and the third containing the comparison results The Compare Tree displays the model s hierarchy with a State column displaying different icons representing the results of the file comparison The icons indicate ifan model part has been added modified 7 moved amp or deleted In the Comparison Result window results are displayed in different colors to differentiate the results of the file comparison The comparison options and corresponding colors are Option Color Description View Additions Green Indicates that something has been added View Deletions Red Indicates that something has been deleted View Unchanged Blue Indicates that there is no change Comparing 3D Files The fo
122. Y SEARCH 6 Enter a file name or browse to locate the directory where you want to store the file then click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the results a csv Comma Separated Values or xml file 7 Click Close to close the Bill of Material dialog Entity Search AutoVue allows you to search for entities in a 3D model using the Entity Search dialog Entity Search 130 Search Advanced 3D Search Containing Text Selection Type Attribute Filters Definition PMI Filter PMI Type Results Type You can search the whole model or selected entities on the model perform a 3D text search apply attributes entity type or PMI filters as search criteria to filter entities You can also search for entities by the size of an entity and location or select entities from the results list and have them appear highlighted in the workspace and in the Model Tree The search options are 156 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH Where 3D Search tab Option Selection Description Specify if you want to search the entire model or selected parts or parts that are not selected Type Specify the type of entity you want to search For example part body assembly or PMI Show PMI parent entity in results When selected displays only the parent entity of a PMI entity that matches search criteria If cleared displays PMI entities that match search criteria in th
123. a TE ub EM etu ND ET 215 Adding Entities oco dre ed ede rente ep Cera penu esee 216 Rescinding the SIGMOMT is a d iu d ben aita ue e c Op ERU USO Dd 216 R Approving a SIgholf 217 Viewing the History of a SIQnOff sssssssssscsessscssccssccssccssccsscssscesceessesseceucceseessccsscensccsscessesseeeseees 217 Creating an IntellistaMp ccssessscsssssssssecssssessscsscsssssscsssssessssssesssssscsssssecsuscssssuceacessesesnsesessnseeessesees 217 Adding StaMD un cendum cmm a E Up EUN TL DN VDO TUR Ted 222 Gr ating a New Ee Sectio e Pe DO D e I RENT RUM 223 Deleting a 224 2D Specitic 225 2D Markup EDtICIeS dua cii y 225 Adding a Freestyle Entity utet ecce ceat che deese eere 227 Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes sese 228 Gum imde ar AUR prend of leno 228 Creating 2D non Vector Markup Measure 229 Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities eese eese tees tentes tenta teste nionns 235 2D Vector Snapping Modes aene esiste aeris ea ted ber torres trade Wt corp eere e Teen S 235 Measuring Distance Sa Costo d Lee e 236 Measuring Cumulative
124. a PCB A through hole via connects the surface layers of a board On multilayer boards a via not reaching a surface layer on one side is called a blind via and a via not reaching a surface layer on either side thus being externally invisible is called a buried via Viastack A numbered list of via descriptions Each description contains a via definition including layer style drill diameter size offset and solder mask guard width Via string The copper etch that exists between a SMT pad and a corresponding fanout via Zero length connection An unrouted connection between layers where the end points in the connection have the same X and Y coordinates Zone An area on a PCB layer designated as copper or anti copper Copper zones may have net names while anti copper zones may not 336 APPENDIX B AUTOVUE PRODUCT VARIATIONS FEATURE MATRIX Appendix B AutoVue Product Variations Feature Matrix The following tables list the available features of the AutoVue Enterprise Visualization product family The tables are organized by the following features general features 2 D and EDA common features 2 D features EDA features 3 D features markup features and collaboration features Note that several of the following features are supported only if the file that is being viewed in AutoVue contains relevant information General Features
125. a file display different views layers and blocks of the current active file You can also navigate from one page to another page of a multi page file 3D View For some ECAD formats AutoVue supports 3D views of PCB boards TASK 1 Inthe Navigation Panel click the Bookmarks tab 2 Select 3D Model from the navigation tree RESULT The 3D view of the PCB board is displayed in the workspace NOTE 3D view can also be accessed from the View menu selecting Page and then selecting Next or from the AutoVue toolbar and then clicking Next Page Lb Cross Probing Cross probing is the ability to select elements in the schematic and have them mapped to the corresponding components in the layout drawings and vice versa The following sections provide information on cross probing between two or more EDA files displaying the net connectivity when cross probing and cross probing between 2D and 3D views of the same file 80 WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING Cross Probing Between Two or More EDA Files The Cross Probe option lets you select entities in the schematic drawing or the PCB design to highlight in all the open files TASK 1 Open an EDA file to cross probe 2 From the Analysis menu select Cross Probe ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Cross Probe 0 STEP RESULT The Cross Probe dialog appears Click Add File 4 Inthe Open dialog that appears enter the file name
126. a schematic drawing or a PCB design you can select entities in either file You can also select entities in any open view when cross probing the 2D view and 3D view of the same file Right click and select Zoom Selected RESULT AutoVue zooms to the same entities in all the open file or views See Also Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing for more information Comparing a PCB with Artwork You can visually compare PCB designs or schematic drawings In Compare mode for EDA files EDA options such as Select Entity Entity Search dialog and Entity Filter are available TASK 1 2 Open the PCB file that you want to compare with the artwork From the Analysis menu select Compare STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to locate the artwork file you want to compare with the PCB file Click Open STEP RESULT The PCB Artwork Comparison dialog appears From the box select the PCB Physical layer that represents the artwork ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example TOP or BOTTOM Click OK STEP RESULT AutoVue displays three windows the first displaying the original drawing the second displaying the Artwork drawing and the third the Comparison Result window 84 WORKING WITH EDA FILES GENERATING BILL OF MATERIAL BOM 7 To exit Compare mode from the File menu select Exit Compare ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Exit Compare
127. a single markup entity NOTE You can only group markup entities created on the same page 266 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES Grouping Markup Entities TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace select the markup entities that you want to group 2 From the Markup menu select Object and then select Group ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the selected markup entities and then select Group STEP RESULT The group of entities appear in the tree under Group 3 Perform any modifications RESULT The modifications are applied to all the entities in the group Ungrouping Markup Entities TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree or the workspace select the group that you want to ungroup 2 From the Markup menu select Object and then select UnGroup RESULT The group of entities appear on the markup as individual entities Deleting Markup Entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity that you want to delete To select multiple markup enti ties press the Shift or Control keys while selecting 2 From the Markup Properties toolbar click Delete Markups g RESULT The selected entity or entities are deleted from the current active file NOTE You can also press the Delete key to delete the markup entities Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree and select Delete 267 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERT
128. along a path select Cumula tive Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 2 Measure distance between two points measure cumulative distance From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 97 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring Minimum Distance Usethe Minimum Distance option to measure the minimum distance between entities The available entities for snapping
129. alysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Arc tab 3 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc STEP RESULT All arc and circles are highlighted on the model Snapping modes are disabled 4 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points STEP RESULT Snapping modes are enabled 168 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc distance If you selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordi nates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog If you selected Arc Entity click the edge of the arc that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEPRESULT Thearcis highlighted The measurements for center point coordinates radius ratio arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears display
130. ample the component name You may want each project to have its own footprint library containing all the footprints used in that project Ground plane A large area on the PCB usually an entire layer that provides a common ground connection for all component ground pins and other ground connections Heatsink A mechanical device made of a high thermal conductivity material that dissipates heat generated by a component or assembly Heuristics A method of routing that consists of repeated attempts to apply very simple routing patterns to unrouted connections in order to complete the routing quickly and cleanly Typically heuristics are used for memory and short point to point routing Hole The area where board material must be removed by drilling or milling Isolation The clearance around a pad track zone or via that defines the nearest approach allowed by conductors of another signal set Jumper wire A discrete electrical component or wire used to make electrical connections between points that have no copper etch due to board density or some other factor Keepout An area fill within which no routing is allowed Land The copper pad needed for a surface mount pin Layer The copper pad needed for a surface mount pin Manual routing Individual connections in the form of traces vertices arcs and so on which are entered manually into the PCB design Mounting hole
131. and click OK STEP RESULT The fill color changes for the selected markup entity or entities Click OK to close the Fill Color dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill color Assigning a Markup Entity the Same Color as the Layer TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to assign the color of the layer that they belong to 271 MARKUPS FoRMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES 2 To assign the line color From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Color The Line Color dialog appears NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Color Alter natively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Color From the Line Color list select Bylayer 2 To assign the fill color From the Markup menu select Format and then select Fill Color The Fill Color dialog appears NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Fill Color From the Fill Color list select Bylayer 5 Click OK RESULT The selected markup entity or entities change to the color of the layer that the entity belongs to Changing Font You can change the font of the text box leader and measurement entities TASK 1 2 Create the markup entity that you want From the workspace or the Markup Navigation Tree select the markup entity fo
132. and size STEP REsULT The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type style and size 8 Click OK to implement the font changes and to close the Font dialog 228 MARKUPS 2D SPEciFIC MARKUPS 9 change the line properties or fill color of the Leader select the Leader then from the Markup menu select Format and then select the property or properties you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective line property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the line style line thickness fill types and fill colors 10 Right click outside the text area to complete the modification ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit the Leader text double click the Leader in the tree or in the workspace STEP REsULT The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree Creating 2D non Vector Markup Measure Entities When marking up 2D non vector files in addition to all the markup options available for 2D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work a bit differently than in View mode See 2D Specific Markups When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized or deleted You can also modify the font of a measure entity align a free snap measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis as well as add uni
133. and then click Open RESULT The offline file opens with all associated markups and resources You can continue working on your files Removing Offline Files from AutoVue When working in AutoVue in offline mode you can remove offline files TASK 1 From the File menu select Manage Offline Files STEP RESULT The Offline Files dialog appears 329 AUTOVUE IN OFFLINE MODE WORKING IN OFFLINE MODE 2 Select the offline files you want to remove and then click Remove STEP RESULT A dialog appears verifying that you want to remove the offline files 3 Click Yes RESULT The offline files are removed Synchronizing Files in Offline Mode When you have access to the server backend DMS system you can synchronize your local changes to the server backend system You can bring any new Markup files you created while offline to the server backend system or you can update the offline Markup files with changes from the server backend system To synchronize files select Synchronize Offline Files from the File menu NOTE If you are connecting to a backend system you are prompted for login information If there are conflicts during synchronization AutoVue prompts you with the following options Keep offline version Replace Markup files that are on the server backend system with the offline file changes e Keep online version Replace the offline files with the server backend system Markup files Save Markup Fi
134. ants in the Collaboration Session can choose between displaying or hiding the Controller s View changes When a session is initiated the Host is also the Controller The Controller can change the base file anytime during the Collaboration Session However when the Controller is not the the Host opening a new file has to be approved by the Host At any time during a session a participant who is not an Observer can request control of a Collaboration Session Any user who is not the Controller of the Collaboration Session can choose to display the Controller s View modifications on the base file and the other participants modifications on the Markup file made during the Collaboration Session To do so from the Collaborate menu select Lock View to Presenter or from the Collaborate status bar click Lock View to Presenter 28 When you lock your view the file displayed will have the same Configuration options that the Controller set in the Configure menu NOTE For all users except for the Controller view options are disabled 312 REAL TIME COLLABORATION OBSERVER To unlock your view from the presenter s from the Collaborate menu again select Lock View to Presenter or from the Collaborate status bar click Unlock View to Presenter gt Observer Observers can take part in a Collaboration Session but cannot create Markup entities They can observe and make comments in the Chat window The Host can designate a user as a
135. arch criteria in the File Open dialog 1 ADMS PLM ERP UCM system is referred to as DMS in this document 2 Depending on the type of backend system AutoVue is connected to the button name will change 30 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES Refer to Oracle VueLink documentation for more information TASK 1 From the File menu select Open STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 To search for a file in the backend DMS system from the left panel click Search DMS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If AutoVue is configured with a single DMS the name of the DMS appears instead of DMS If AutoVue is connected to multiple backend DMS systems a list of the DMS system names appear when you click Search DMS Select the DMS in which you want to perform the search STEP RESULT An authentication dialog appears 3 Enterthe login information and then click OK 5 RESULT The search criteria options load in the File Open dialog 4 Enter the search criteria and then click Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Alternately to view all files in the backend DMS system leave the search criteria fields empty and click Search STEP REsULT The file results appear in the dialog For each AutoVue session all search results are saved and can be referenced from the File Open dialog as Search Results 1 Search Results 2 and so on 5 Selecta file and then click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace Streaming File
136. arch entities with PMI select With PMI search entities without PMI select Without PMI 8 From the PMI Type list select the type of entity that you want to search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The PMI Type list is disabled if All is selected from the PMI Filter list 9 Click Search to perform the entity search RESULT The search results appear in the Results list Performing a 3D Text Search From the Containing Text field of the Entity Search dialog you can search for a text string in the 3D model By default AutoVue searches the attribute name and attribute value for the entered text Enter the text you want to search for in the Containing Text field and then click Search Performing an Attribute based Search From the Entity Search dialog you can search for entities by their attributes such as color density shading and so on TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search AQ STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears Click the 3D Search tab Select the search criteria that you want to use for your search 159 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH 4 Click Add STEP RESULT The Attribute Filter dialog appears Attribute Filter Mame COLOUR value Colour Value Test Equals Value 5 From the Name list select the attribute that you want to search STEP R
137. ars Enter a name for the Markup file in the Name field 4 Ifyou wish to password protect the Markup file select the Password Protected check box 5 Ifyou wish to save the Markup file to a location on a local computer click Export 6 Click OK 7 Ifyou wish to send the updated Mobile Pack with your default e mail client from the AutoVue menu bar select Collaborate and then select Reply to Mobile Pack RESULT Your default e mail client opens with the Mobile Pack avp as an attachment Defining Markup Policy Markup policy defines a set of rules to determine certain restrictions and privileges for users ofthe Mobile Pack If no markup policy is defined in the Mobile Pack a default set of values are used The default markup policy file MarkupPolicy xml can be found in the AutoVue installa tion bin folder The following table explains the actions included in the markup policy their default values and which values can be modified All the following actions can be combined with certain exceptions 305 AUTOVUE MOBILE DEFINING MARKUP POLICY Action SaveNewMarkup lt TRUE FALSE gt Description If TRUE new Markup file creation inside the Mobile Pack is allowed If FALSE new Markup file creation inside the Mobile Pack is not allowed For new imported local file Markup file Markup Save and Markup Save As are disabled For an existing Markup file Markup Save As is disabled Default
138. ars when you selected HP Laserjet Print TIFF or Compuserve GIF from the Convert to Format list Specify the variety of convert to format by selecting a sub format Convert Region The area of the file to be converted The available options are Display the area displayed in the workspace For example if you zoomed in on a particular region of the file the zoomed portion of the file is converted Extent refers to the entire extents of the file Convert Pages The number of pages to be converted The available options are All convert all pages Current convert the current page Range convert the pages indicated in the range X and Y Choose from pixels inches and millimeters for the units With raster files the units are preset as pixels X indicates the number of horizontal pixels Y is the number of vertical pixels for the current active file contents At times AutoVue will preset X and Y to match the specifications of the selected conversion file format Other times X and Y will be available and may be changed according to your preferences Your selection here will not affect the current display but will affect the conversion file s resolution Converting a 3D Model TASK 1 From the File menu select Convert STEP RESULT The Convert dialog appears 2 Inthe Save As field enter the path and filename or click Browse to locate the directory where you want to convert the file to then en
139. ate menu select Transform and then select Reset All 3 Toreset selected model parts to their original transformation from the Manipu late menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also reset selected model parts To do so from the Model Tree deselect the check box beside the parts in the Transformation column 49 RESULT The model or selected parts are reverted back to their original transformation 138 WORKING WITH 3D FILES SECTIONING Transforming a Model by Setting Values TASK 1 9 M Oo m Bow 10 11 From the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Define ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Transform STEP RESULT The Transformation dialog appears Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate translate or scale ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting To rotate the model by set values enter the X Y and Z value To translate the model by set values enter the X Y and Z value To view a mirror image in the Mirror section of the dialog select a check box To scale the model by a factor enter a scale factor in the Factor field Click Apply To apply absolute transformation instead of incremental select the Absolute check box Click Apply To repeat a transformation deselect Absolute then continue clicking Appl
140. ation and time to market are just a few of the business benefits organizations can expect to achieve This manual explores AutoVue s key capabilities and is designed to help you get the most out of AutoVue s extensive functionality Oracle AutoVue Oracle AutoVue is a viewing and markup application that has been developed for both business and technical users AutoVue is capable of displaying hundreds of file formats without the authoring application Supported file types include Text Office Graphics EDA 2D Engineering Drawings and 3D Models Even contents of archive files can viewed in AutoVue NOTE Although not required we recommend that file names include their standard file extensions If the file extensions are not included AutoVue may require additional time to load a file Marking Up Documents 17 INTRODUCTION MARKING UP DOCUMENTS AutoVue has the ability to create markups for all its readable file formats without the docu ment s authoring application AutoVue creates markups for different formats without modifying the original file You can attach comments notes and drawings to any file you display in AutoVue This is called marking up a file commonly known as annotating or redlining A markup is an object or entity that you attach to a file All markups are saved in a separate file called a Markup or a Markup file When you display a file with its markups the markups are overlaid as a layer on top of the draw
141. aximum Route Specify the maximum Length route trace length allowed in the design 15 Empty Nets Select this check box if you want to check for any nets that are not connected to any pin via trace and power ground plane 89 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type 16 Design Rule Check Un routed Traces Description Select this check box if you want to check for any trace segment that is not connected to another trace segment pin via on either end 17 Single Connection Select this check box if you want to check for a net connected to only one pin NOTE Power and ground nets are the exception 18 Short Circuit Select this check box if you want to check for intersections on the same layer of traces that belong to different nets NOTE Trace entities will be divided into n sets where n is the number of nets in the design 19 Unconnected Pin Select this check box if you want to check for any pin pad that is not graphically intersected with any traces on the same physical layer Verifying a Design The following steps describe how to verify a design TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Verify Design STEP RESULT The Verify Design dialog appears To enable a design rule select the associated check box in the Design Rules section of the dialog 90 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION
142. b click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP REsULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab 257 Markups 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 24 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Click the Angle tab 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT Entities of the selected types are highlighted on the model 4 To measure the angle between an entity type and a plane select the With Plane check box and then select the plane from the list 5 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 6 Click two points on the model to define the angle If you selected a Plane click the vertex edge or face whose angle you want to measure between the plane ADDITIONAL INFORMATI
143. backend system e Click the Reset button to retrieve the attribute values defined in the backend system When you are done modifying the attribute click OK to finalize your changes and to close the DMS Attributes dialog Intellistamp in a Mobile Pack If you view the Intellistamp markup entity from a Mobile Pack the Commit Changes and Reset buttons appear in the DMS Attributes dialog Click the Commit Changes button to upload the changes made to the DMS Attri butes dialog to the Mobile Pack 221 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Click the Reset button to reset the Intellistamp attribute values to those defined in the Mobile Pack When you are done modifying the attribute click OK to finalize your changes and to close the DMS Attributes dialog Adding a Stamp A Stamp is a graphical entity such as a company logo Before a graphic entity can be used as a stamp it must be added to a Stamp Library You can create a Stamp Library and add stamps to it You can also add or remove stamps from existing libraries TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Stamp ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Stamp STEP RESULT The Stamps dialog appears Stamps 20 Stamps i Libraries Stamp Library Status v Drag and drop stamp into Autovue Draft APPROVED e Scaling Isotropic 7 Anisotropic Selected Stamp Sour
144. betically or numeri cally or click Status to sort by visibility Select the check box beside the layers that you want to set visible 4 Deselect the check box beside the layers that you want to hide Click OK to close the Layers to Display dialog RESULT The selected layers are displayed 42 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Selecting Blocks Use this option to select a block to display from the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Blocks ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Blocks 48 STEP RESULT The Select a Block to Display dialog appears listing the blocks for the current active file 2 From the list select the block that you want to display 3 Click OK STEP RESULT The selected block is displayed 4 Toreturn to the default display select Default View Displaying XRefs AutoVue references various sources to obtain all the data required to completely and correctly display files These sources can be internal to the file like layers and blocks External reference files XRefs are located outside the file Use the XRefs option to display the external references of the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select XRefs STEP RESULT The Select the External References to Display dialog appears listing the external refe
145. bile Pack Also since native files are not released including the streaming file increases security See Also Streaming Files 302 AUTOVUE MOBILE VIEWING MOBILE PACKS Option Description Rendition Lets you choose to include a PDF or TIFF rendition in the Mobile Pack 13 If you wish to set an expiry date for the Mobile Pack from the Publishing option select the Expiry Date check box and then select a date The Mobile Pack cannot be opened after this expiry date 14 Ifyou wish to include a streaming file from the Streaming File option select whether to include a native file or streaming file in the Mobile Pack 15 If you wish from the Rendition option you can include a PDF or TIFF rendition in the Mobile Pack 16 Click OK to complete Mobile Pack creation RESULT If you selected the E Mail check box your default e mail client opens with the Mobile Pack avp as an attachment Otherwise the Mobile Pack is output to the specified location Viewing Mobile Packs Mobile Packs are opened in the same way as ordinary files Users have access to all the external reference files XRefs resource files and markups bundled with the base file Additionally users have the option to modify existing markups or create new ones to be associated with the Mobile Pack You can open a Mobile Pack as you would open any other file in AutoVue TASK 1 From the AutoVue menu bar select File and th
146. c 59 101 169 234 241 248 259 vector files distance 53 non vector markup measure entities 229 text search 35 vector files 41 analyzing 47 comparing 48 displaying layers 42 displaying xrefs 43 manipulate 41 overlay 44 modify 45 remove 46 selecting blocks 43 vector markup measure entities 235 viewing options 36 magnify glass 39 magnify window 40 pan and zoom window 40 selecting views 46 specifying a view point 46 working with 2D files 35 3D 3D views 120 advanced 3D search 161 bill of material 155 Bookmarks tab 23 65 105 comparing files 151 152 153 coverting 294 display attributes 114 color 116 transparency 116 visibility 115 entity properties 123 entity search 156 158 attribute based search 159 save results 162 explode 142 143 options 142 save 144 files 103 global axes 105 interference checks 148 149 150 light setting 117 ambient 117 directional 118 new light source 118 properties 119 remove light source 119 manipulate mode 130 panning model 130 rotating model 131 scaling model 132 manipulating views 112 markup entities 252 markup measure entities create 253 markups 211 252 measuring 162 angle 168 arc 168 calibrating arc 59 101 169 234 241 248 259 calibrating distance 54 97 166 231 238 245 257 distance 165 edge length 170 face surface 171 minimum distance 167 snapping modes 163 254 vertex coordinates 169 mockups 111 delete 111 Model Tree 108 109 110 hiding 110 XR
147. ce File Stamp Name Description 222 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Click the Stamps tab From the Stamp Library list select the library from which you want to select a stamp STEP REsULT The stamps appear for the selected library Click Isotropic if you want to scale the stamp proportionately Click Anisotropic if you want to scale the stamp disproportionately Drag the stamp onto the workspace ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more stamps repeat steps 3 to 5 STEP REsULT The stamp appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree Close the Stamps dialog Creating a New Stamp Library TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Stamp The Stamps dialog appears ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Stamp Click the Libraries tab 223 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 3 Click Create STEP RESULT The Stamp Library dialog appears Stamp Library Selected Files Name Description Author Keywords Enter the library name description author and keywords in their respective fields To add a stamp to the library click Add STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Browse to locate the stamp you want to add and then click Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more stamps repeat steps 4 to 6 To remove a stamp select the stamp and click Remove STEP RESULT The fil
148. ck Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring Cumulative Distance Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of multi faceted adjoining points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance lt STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 3 Toselectall snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Select Cumulative 6 Click the first entity to define the starting point Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 237 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 8 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP REsULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance betwe
149. ck and drag the mouse to draw an Arc From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc Cx Box Click and drag to draw a rectangle From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Box To draw a square instead of a rectangle press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag Cloud Click and drag to draw a Cloud From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Cloud A 225 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Markup Entity Circle Entity Information Click and drag to draw a circle From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Circle Q To draw a circle instead of an ellipse press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag Freestyle Highlight Create freestyle entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Freestyle Zw See Adding a Freestyle Entity Click and drag to highlight a boxed area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Highlight e The highlighted box will be filled with a transparent color Leader Line Create leader entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Leader See Adding a Leader Click and drag to draw a line From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Line draw a line and force it to be aligned to the closer axis horizontal or vertical press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag See Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes M
150. ck the markup entity select Format and then select Move to Layer STEP RESULT The Move to Layer dialog appears 209 MARKUPS CoNSOLIDATING MARKUP FILES 3 Fromthe Layers list select the destination layer 4 Click OK RESULT The selected markup entity or entities are moved to the selected layer Only markup entities using the ByLayer color will change to the new layer s color See Also Working with Markup Entities Consolidating Markup Files The Consolidate option allows you to create a new Markup file that combines copies of selected layers of different Markup files During the review cycle consolidation simplifies document revisions by providing the author with one combined Markup file instead of several Markup files Note that the Consolidate option is only active when more than one Markup file is opened TASK 1 Open the Markup files that you want to consolidate 2 From the Markup menu select Consolidate STEP RESULT The Consolidate Markups dialog appears 3 Select the markup layers that you want to consolidate into one file To select multiple layers press the Shift or Control key while selecting ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all the layers click Select All and to deselect all the layers click UnSelect All 4 Inthe Output ID field enter an ID for the new Markup file If you want to open the newly consolidated markup as the active markup select the Open as Active Markup check box
151. cluding streaming file and setting an expiry date on the Mobile Pack continue to the next step 11 If you do not wish to modify advanced options click Finish to complete Mobile Pack creation 301 AUTOVUE MOBILE CREATING A MOBILE PACK 12 Create Mobile Pack Click the Advanced tab ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Depending on the Company Wide Policy settings the Advanced tab options might be disabled For more information on Company Wide Policy refer to the Installation and Administration Manual Publishing C Expiry Date Streaming File Include Native File Include Streaming File Rendition 5 Don t Include Rendition Include PDF Rendition Include TIFF Rendition ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The following table lists the options available in the Advanced tab Option Publishing Description Lets you specify an expiry date for the Mobile Pack After the expiry date the content of the Mobile Pack will not be accessible Streaming File Lets you choose to include the native file or the streaming file in the Mobile Pack There are certain limitations when loading streaming files Streaming files do not support blocks and views options Streaming file requirements change with each release of AutoVue As a result a streaming file from a previous version of AutoVue cannot be loaded in the latest release For 3D files including the streaming file reduces the file size of the Mo
152. color and ordering To display the Layers dialog from the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 5 NOTE For drawings that do not contain layers the Layers menu option and button are disabled The Layers dialog has a Physical Layers section and a Logical Layers section You can display and hide these sections by clicking Expand and Collapse respectively Physical and Logical Layers Sections The Logical Layers section displays the layers in the order they display in the workspace The Physical Layers section displays the layers in the order they appear in the layer stackup when manufactured The Physical Layers section displays a matrix with a mapping of physical layer names to entity types Each row in the matrix corresponds to a physical layer in the board Each column in the matrix lets you control the visibility of an entity type such as pin via or trace The entity types that display depend on the entities available in the open file Select a physicallayer to change its visibility layer order and color Select or deselect the entity type of a physical layer to affect its visibility separately from the other entities of the layer When you select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section the associated logical layers are also selected in the Logical Layers section You can also select individual logical layers from the Logical Layers
153. color from the palette Use this button if you want to change the color of all logical layers associated with a selected physical layer or to change the color of many selected logical layers at the same time Double click a square in the Color column Logical Layers section and then select a color from the palette Use this option to change the color of individual logical layers STEP RESULT The color of all selected layers changes in the Color column Click Apply to save the changes STEP RESULT The display updates in the workspace based on the changes you made to the layer color You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set Click Close to close the Layers dialog 76 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYER SETS Sorting Logical Layers You can sort the list of logical layers in the Logical Layers section by name visibility color or physical layer TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 55 STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Ifthe Logical Layers section is not open click Expand 3 Click the column header of an attribute RESULT Layers are sorted according to the attribute header you click For example if you click the Color 0 column header the logical layers in the section are grouped according to their color NOTE To restore the original sort ord
154. ct Markup Panel Markups vq Markup Entity Author LastModified A Page Layer El Untitled2 Text JohnDoe 04 03 2008 11 51 06 1 0 3 Leader JohnDoe 04 03 2008 11 51 08 1 0 bnb JohnDoe 04 03 2008 11 51 22 AM 1 0 Highlight JohnDoe 04 03 2008 11 51 24 1 0 O Box JohnDoe 04 03 2008 11 51 28 1 0 Line JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 31 1 0 The tree displays a hierarchy of markups or comments created by users You can navigate through the markups A set of properties is generated for each markup You can sort the markups in the tree according to each property by clicking the column headers These properties are Property Description Markup Entity Type of markup entity created Author The name of the user who created the markup entity Last Modified The date and time the markup entity was last modified Page Page number of the original document on which the markup entity is created Layer Markup layer on which the markup entity is created When a markup entity is created it appears in the tree and the information is recorded and saved in the Markup file NOTE Hover your mouse over an entity to display its author and date properties Status Bar When in View mode or Markup mode the status bar is located at the bottom of the main window The fields displayed from left to right on the status bar are marker current active filename file type zoom factor curre
155. ct Object and then select Rotate 3 Rotate the markup entity by clicking and dragging its control points Pressing the Shift key while dragging will snap the rotation to 45 degree intervals 265 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES Flipping all Markup Entities From the Markup menu select Transform and then select Flip From the menu that appears you have one of two options to select from Flip Horizontal Axis Flips the direction of the horizontal axis of the markup entity Flip Vertical Axis Flips the direction of the vertical axis of the markup entity NOTE The horizontal and vertical axes are aligned with the center of the drawing Hiding All Markup Entities To hide all markup entities do the following TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Hide Markups ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A check mark appears next to the Hide Markups option and the markup entities are hidden on the Markup file 2 To undo the hide option from the Markup menu deselect Hide Markups Hiding Markup Files To hide selected a Markup file do the following TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree right click the Markup file then select Hide 2 undo hide option right click the file name again and select Show Grouping and Ungrouping Markup Entities When you group markup entities you can move delete copy and paste transform or perform any modification on the group of entities that you would on
156. ct Visual Effects and then select Transparency ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Transparency 8 STEP RESULT The Set Transparency dialog appears To adjust the transparency move the slider left or right 4 Select Apply Dynamically if you wantthe transparency to simultaneously change with the movement of the slider ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Alternatively to adjust the transparency level you can enter in the Value field a value from 0 to 1 Where 0 renders the model opaque default state and 1 renders it transparent 5 Click Close to apply the changes and close the Set Transparency dialog 116 WORKING WITH 3D FILES LIGHT SETTINGS Light Settings The default light setting consists of a white light at the 10 o clock position with respect to the model In the Lighting dialog it appears as a grey ball of white light at the 10 o clock position along the circumference of the larger sphere Ambient lighting is the overall lighting that surrounds an object It provides constant illu mination to every surface of the model This type of lighting is particularly effective as a fill light for surfaces not directly illuminated by a directional light source You can set the intensity or source position too high a setting tends to saturate the image and reduce its clarity Using the Directional lighting option you can adjust the position of the light source on an object You can make the follo
157. d as an EMF on the server and then streamed to the printer on the client using Java capabilities NOTE By default this feature is deselected Output a single page Limits output to a single page when the scaling options selected causes a single page to span over several pages Print Row Headers Print row headers Option is only enabled for spreadsheets archive and database files Print Column Headers Print column headers Option is only enabled for spreadsheets archive and database files 281 PRINTING CONFIGURING THE PRINT OPTIONS Option Type Description Partial Preview Display a view of the printer page highlighting the printable area Configuring the Print Options TASK 1 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Click the Options tab Configure the print options Configure other print options pu ge To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears 6 Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Print Margins From the Margins tab of the Print Properties dialog you can define the top bottom right and left margins for the printed file You can define Option Description Margins Set the value
158. d dimensions to meet the search criteria Location Specify an axes aligned boundary box The boundary box of an entity must be inside it to meet the search criteria Performing a Search TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search Q STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears 2 Click the Search tab 3 Fromthe Selection list specify what parts of the model that you want to search To search the entire model select All search specific parts of a model select Selected and then select the parts on the model search the model parts that are not selected select Not selected 4 From the Type list select the type of entity that you want to search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For 3D Models that have PMI information the PMI search features are enabled 5 Select the Show PMI parent entity in results check box if you only want the parent entity of the selected PMI entity or entities to appear in the Results list 6 Deselect the check box if you want all PMI entities to appear in the Results list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The option is enabled if PMI or All are selected from the Type list and the file has PMI entities 158 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH 7 From the PMI Filter list select the type of entities that you want to search To search all entities select All To se
159. d rejoin at a later time if it is still in session From the Collaborate menu select Leave Collaboration Session The other participants are notified that you left the Collaboration Session and AutoVue returns to View mode Chat Window The Chat Window is a tool you can use to communicate with other users You send each other messages via the Chat Window The Chat Window is also useful in giving you Collab oration Session updates such as which users are present and which users have joined or left the session Atthe end ofthe Collaboration Session a transcript of the Chat Window is saved as a Note entity along with the Markup as the Collaboration Session Markup file The Note entity contains session information such who the Host was who was invited and session time and duration The Chat Window contains these menu options Menu Option Description File Send Message Sends text messages to other users Print Prints the contents of the Chat window Quit Closes the Chat window 323 REAL TIME COLLABORATION CHAT WINDOW Menu Option Description Edit Copy Copy text from the Chat window Clear Clears all the text in the Chat window Find Text Searches for text in the Chat window Select All Selects the entire text in the Chat window Options Users Displays the users in the Collaboration Session Sending a Message to Selected Users TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu se
160. d to the Layers list on the AutoVue toolbar By default the Top Bottom and Default layer sets and any other layer sets belonging to the file are listed in the Layer Sets list TASK 1 Fromthe Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 5 STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Click Add STEP RESULT The Add Layer Set dialog appears Enter the layer set name 4 Click OK STEP RESULT The new layer set appears in the Layer Sets list 5 Tomodifythe attributes of the new layer set select one or more layers and change the Visibility Order or Color 6 Click Apply to save the changes and to display the new layer set in the workspace 7 Todefine more layer sets repeat steps 2 to 6 8 Click Close to close the Layers dialog RESULT The new layer set appears in the Layers list beside the Layers Control button 5 on the AutoVue toolbar 78 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYER SETS Deleting User Defined Layer Sets To delete a user defined layer set perform the following steps TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 5 STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens From the Layer Sets list select the user defined layer set you want to delete ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can only delete us
161. der and Footer ae en aet ore dantes itte dene scit eg e oe 284 Addintya Header aiid uui animated ma tdm up a imde qi UR Rn star 285 Native Print UR eu e pistes sudes 286 Materna KS ecd iecore ic n au UU ee Lc be 286 Addirig a Watermark oeste i i rd pta cba a dd RE RID Ep 287 Assigning PervSetttigssco ene eco tva erc tL eto 288 Creating a New Pen Setting corta ester eret 289 Deletingra Peri VI UR UD egt 289 an rase Det cs aed descr ptus 289 Previewing a File Before Printing eee esee teen tentnn tentes tente sttn tontos states stats 290 Printing a File uoo sedi etr get rra np aei e aseo bu t Rr i Eds 290 Batch Printing Ped a area Orr ep pops npe papa e 291 p RM Nn pta AE EA ture Ae 293 Conversion ODLIOLS 293 Converting a 3D Model DURUM DAS 294 PEDE S Pre 295 Xand ec 295 Convertinga File auu eee rai sisii eig nias argus rt pits 296 Changing the Pen Settings 297 AutoVue MODIIB ore tcs totu eo tot aa M LE te t DUE 299 Creating Mobile Packer inner iei 299 V
162. deselect Walkthrough from the View menu The Instructions panel explains the possible model manipulation options while you perform the walkthrough See Walking Through a 3D Model for more information From the Speed panel of the Walkthrough dialog you can adjust the increment speed of the camera for all walkthrough functions By default the Move through walls option is selected This feature allows you to walk through walls when viewing a model You can deselect the option to enable the collision detection feature The Restore last view option saves the last view of the model before exiting walkthrough mode As a result when you re enter walkthrough mode the last view displays Walking Through a 3D Model If you want to position yourself on a surface of the 3D model press the Alt key and double click a point on the surface For example to walk through a 3D model of a house you can Alt double click the landing in front of the door Once you are at your desired view point of the 3D model you can use the arrow keys or mouse to navigate through the model 173 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH The following table lists the available keyboard mouse actions and their function Keyboard Action Up arrow Down arrow Mouse Action Click and drag up down or roll the mouse wheel forward and backward Function Move forward backward Left arrow Right arrow Click and drag left right Turn left r
163. ding a model or just its source light You can also customize operations to suit your needs For example you can create and save your own views Define cross sections and cut throughs of 3D models Create a customized three axis coordinate system that you can set as the active coordinate system for your 3D files There are also features like Bill of Material BOM Interference Checking and Product and Manufacturing Information PMI Filtering Models Tab and Model Tree The Models tab displays the Model Tree The tree displays the model s hierarchy inter rela tion of different parts assemblies and bodies The tree also indicates if a required external reference XRef is missing With the tree you can select different parts and modify their attributes such as color visibility render mode or transformation See Displaying XRefs for more information on XRefs 103 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ViEWS NOTE The Models tab displays only for 3D drawings Models F 6 J E v 3DSolidedge stor amp M v 3DSolidEdge go amp M v 3DSolidEdge H v 3DSolidEdge scre 0 0 0 Models Views Tab The Views tab lists the defaults standard native and user defined views You can switch to a standard native or user defined view as well as add or delete user defined views NOTE The Views tab displays only for 3D drawi
164. e Click OK to close the Options dialog o N DM Click Reset to set the model to its original transformation 10 Click Close to close the Transformation dialog STEP REsULT The transformation state remains displayed 11 Torestore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Rotate Buttons The following diagram identifies the function of each rotate button Clockwise rotate Clockwise rotate around Z axis around Y axis Counter clockwise rotate around X axis Clockwise rotate around X axis Counter clockwise Counter clockwise rotate around Y axis rotate around Z axis NOTE To repeat a transformation continue clicking the button 137 WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL Translate Buttons The following diagram identifies the function of each translate button Scale up Translate Translate along Y axis along Z axis Translate along Translate negative X axis along X axis Translate along Translate along Scale down negative Z axis negative Y axis NOTE To repeat a transformation continue clicking the button Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model You can reset a model or selected parts to their original transformation TASK 1 View the transformed 3D Model 2 Toreset the entire model to its original transformation from the Manipul
165. e Click Close to close the Define Section dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Once you have defined the section plane and closed the Define Section dialog among other options you can choose whether to enable remove or invert a defined section from the Section menu Exporting Section Edges You can export a copy of the section plane and save it as a dxf or dwg file TASK 1 2 Define a section plane From the Manipulate menu select Section and then select Export ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If the Define Section dialog is already open click Export ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Sectioning ip STEP RESULT The Export Section As dialog appears Enter a file name and select a directory location to export the file From the Save As Type list select whether to save the file as dxf or dwg format 141 WORKING WITH 3D FILES EXPLODING 5 Click Save ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To remove a section plane from the Manipulate menu select Section and then select Remove Exploding You can use the Explode option to better understand the structure of an assembly and to analyze the dismount capability You can also save the exploded view as well as obtain a printed document of the exploded product for further analysis Explode Options From the Explode dialog you can define how the explosion is to be performed and to visu ally explode or implode a model The options that you
166. e Results dialog Option is enabled if Type is set to PMI or All and file has PMI entities PMI Filter Filters the entities that have PMI information Option is enabled if Type is set to PMI or All PMI Type Specify the specific PMI attribute you want to search Option is disabled if PMI Filter is set to All Containing Text Specify a text string that you want to search AutoVue searches for a specified string in attribute names and attribute values Attribute Filters Specify attributes to search for in 3D model See Performing an Attribute based Search Attribute Filter dialog Name Specify the specific attribute you want to search Some of the available attributes Color Density Display_Mode Filepath Layer_ID Name Translucency Visibility NOTE The attributes vary depending on the file being viewed See Performing an Attribute based Search Any Value When selected AutoVue searches for any value of the selected attribute The attribute value options are disabled If cleared specify the values for the selected attribute you want to search The attribute value options correspond to the selected attribute 157 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH Where Option Description Advanced 3D Volume Specify the size of an entity the minimum and maximum Search tab dimensions The dimensions of an entity boundary box must be between the specifie
167. e or right click an entity in the workspace Naviga tion Panel or Entity Search dialog and then select Show Entity Properties Entity Properties Associations Entity Info f Component Instance B Pin H RefDes U5 Part Type 550 50 20 lt 200 40 Location 50 000000 20 000000 0 000000 Rotation 0 000000 Component Definition 550 50 20 lt 200 40 Glued false Layer Top Number of Connections 0 On the left side of the Entity Properties dialog a tree displays all the entities associated with the entity you selected The entity you selected is the root of the tree and all the associated entities grouped by their type are shown as its children The attributes of the entity display to the right of the tree under Entity Info In the tree select any associated entity to display its attributes under Entity Info You can also view entity attributes in the workspace When you hover the mouse over an entity in the workspace a tooltip with commonly used entity information appears You can turn these tooltips off or on from the Configuration dialog See Configuring AutoVue for more information on the Configuration dialog Viewing the Properties of an Entity The Entity Properties dialog displays detailed information about any selected entity in the current schematic drawing or PCB design TASK 1 Select the entity in the workspace or from the Navigation Panel or
168. e Logical Layers section is not open click Expand 3 Inthe Logical Layers section you can show or hide the following Option Description One logical layer Multiplelogicallayers To select more than one layer press the Shift or Control key while selecting Select the check box in the Visibility column e and then click Visibility 75 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS 4 Click Apply to view the changes in the workspace 5 Youcan now save your changes as a user defined layer set 6 Click Close to close the Layers dialog Changing Layer Color You can modify the color of any physical or logical layer from the Layers dialog TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 5 STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens If necessary click Expand to open the Logical Layers section ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select the layer or layers for which you want to change the color You can select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section logical layers associated with the selected physical layer are also selected You can also select individual logical layers from the Logical Layers section or press the Shift or Control key while selecting to select multiple layers After you select a layer you do one of the following to modify its color Click Modify Color 0 and then select a
169. e active 3 Click OK Changing the Color of a Markup Layer After you create a markup layer you have the option to change the color of its markup enti ties TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 From the Markup Layers list select the markup layer whose color you want to change 3 Click Color STEP RESULT The Layer Color dialog appears 4 Selecta Color 207 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Only the entities that were created with the Bylayer color defined in the Markup Layers dialog will change color Any entities that were created using the color options from the Markup Properties toolbar will override the Bylayer color and will not change Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog Renaming a Markup Layer After you create a markup layer you have the option to rename the layer TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers The Markup Layers dialog appears From the Markup Layers list select the markup layer you want to rename Click Rename STEP RESULT The New Markup Layer dialog appears Enter the new layer name Click OK STEP RESULT The markup layer is assigned the new name Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog Toggling between Markup Layers From the Markup Layers dialog you can choose to show or hide a layer and its associated markup entities TASK
170. e appears in the Stamp Files list Close the Stamps dialog Deleting a Stamp Library TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Stamp The Stamps dialog appears ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Stamp FA Click the Libraries tab From the Stamp Libraries list select the library that you want to delete 224 MARKUPS 2D SPEciFIC MARKUPS 4 Click Delete STEP RESULT The library disappears from the list and from the Stamp Library list under the Stamps tab 5 Close the Stamps dialog 2D Specific Markups AutoVue provides a variety of user friendly markup options that you can use when marking up 2D files You can create entities such as arcs boxes circles clouds lines and polygons You can draw a leader with multi line segments and add text to it NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel 2D Markup Entities You can create many different types of 2D markup entities To access the markup entities from the Markup menu select Add Entity The available 2D markup entities are listed in the following table NOTE To complete a markup entity for example to finish creating a box simply right click in the AutoVue workspace If you do not right click to complete entity creation you will continue in the markup creation mode of that entity Markup Entity Entity Information Arc Cli
171. e layer you want to make active 2 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The selected layer appears in the workspace See Setting the Active Markup Layer 277 MARKUPS FoRMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Leader Alignment With the Leader markup entity you can adjust the location of the leader line s anchor point to the text box The Leader Alignment list has the following option for anchor point loca tion with respect to the text box Top Left Top Center Top Right Center Left Center Center Right Bottom Left Bottom Center and Bottom Right Text Box Visibility You can choose to hide the surrounding box for the Leader Text and 3D Text markup enti ties 278 Printing With AutoVue you can print and preview files Original files can be printed on their own or with associated markups and overlays You can also choose which markup layers to make visible so that they can print With the Batch Print option you can send a list of files to print at the same time When printing a file there are print properties that you can define From the File menu select Print to display the following properties Option Description Print Define the print options See Print Options Margins Define the margin settings See Print Margins Headers Footers Define the headers footers to be included on every page printed See Header Footer Watermark Defin
172. e the watermark to be included on every page printed See Watermarks Pen Settings Change the thickness assigned to a pen See Assigning Pen Settings Print Options With the Options tab you can define print options for the printed file The options are 279 PRINTING PRINT OPTIONS Option Printer Type Modify Description Select a printer and configure print properties such as paper size number of copies and so on Paper size Displays selected paper size Orientation Portrait Specify if file should be printed portrait Landscape Specify if the file should be printed landscape Auto Specify if orientations should be printed as saved in the file Note Option is available with Java 2 and is only enabled for PDF and word documents Units Select a unit from the drop down list to set the unit for Scaling and Alignment Offset The available units are pixels inches and millimeters Scaling Fit to Page Scales the image to fit on the output page Factor Scales the image according to the scaling factors that you have manually entered in the input fields Scale Scales the image according to a percentage You can select a predefined scaling factor or manually enter a custom scaling factor Decimal places are accepted Alignment Offset Specify where the drawing will appear on the printout Some of the available options are Top Left Center Right
173. e to display child entities of a selected node or nodes You can also configure the level you want to expand the Model Tree TASK 1 2 Click the Models tab From the Model Tree select the node or nodes that you want to expand then right click and select Expand All Children ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one node press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT The selected entities are highlighted The Model Tree expands displaying the child entities of the selected nodes To collapse a node select the node then right click and select Collapse All Chil dren STEP RESULT The Model Tree collapses the selected node RESULT The Model Tree collapses the selected node You can also expand a node by clicking collapse a node click amp Viewing Missing XRef Notification Icon If the loaded drawing is missing XRefs the Missing XRef Notification icon 4 appears in the Model Tree to the left of the missing XRef To view XRefs are missing do the following See Also Displaying Details About Resources TASK 1 From the status bar click the Missing Resource icon X STEP RESULT The Properties dialog appears You can also view the missing XRef from the File menu and then selecting Properties Click the Resource Information tab STEP RESULT Any missing XRefs appear in the External Reference File Reference File Resources section of the dialog and are preceded by 2 Click OK
174. e window Associated application Opens the attachment in its associated application 7 Click OK to close the Attach File dialog STEP RESULT The attachment appears on the markup workspace and in the Markup Navi gation Tree 8 Right click in the workspace to complete the attachment Opening an Attachment To open an attachment do one of the following Double click or the attachment icon in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree IfA new applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open the attachment in a new AutoVue window If Current applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open in the current AutoVue window 212 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES J IfAssociated application was selected while attaching the file it will open in its associated application Inthetree right click the attachment entity in the tree select Attachment and then select one of the following Open The attachment opens in AutoVue If A new applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open in a new AutoVue window If Current applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open in the current AutoVue window Open With You have the option to open the attachment with AutoVue or its Associated Application Editing an Attachment TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree right click the attachment and select Edit or double click the markup en
175. easured line path STEP RESULT The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Toresize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring Cumulative Distance Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of multi faceted adjoining points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance lt STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 3 Toselectall snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 5 Select Cumulative 6 Clickthe first entity to define the starting point 7 Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 244 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STE
176. easurement Create markup measure entities 1 e 23 From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance xxx Area 5 Angle 2 Arc or Minimum Distance 1 See Creating 2D non Vector Markup Measure Entities Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities Note Add a note to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note EZ See Adding a Note Polygon Click and drag to draw a polygon From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Polygon 2 Polyline Click and drag to draw a polyline From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Polyline A To force a line segment in a Polyline entity to be aligned to the closer axis horizontal or vertical press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag for that line segment See Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes 226 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Markup Entity Entity Information Stamp Create stamp markup entities Text From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Stamp See Adding a Stamp Add text to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Text AL See Adding Text Adding a Freestyle Entity You can create a freestyle markup entity You have the option of making the entity non contiguous or contiguous Creating a Contiguous Freestyle Entity TASK 1 From the
177. ect the attributes that you want to appear in the report 4 Click Generate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To sorta column by alphanumerical or alphabetical order click on the column heading STEP RESULT The Bill of Material dialog appears listing the count for each component or part possessing the attributes you selected There are also columns displaying the values of the attributes you selected 5 Tosave the BOM click Export STEP REsULT The Export BOM dialog appears 6 Specify the directory where you want to store the file the file name and extension then click Save ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can specify either pdx Product Data Exchange or csv Comma Separated Values for the extension STEP RESULT AutoVue automatically saves the results in a file with the specified extension 7 Click Close to close the Bill of Material dialog Design Verification Design verifications are operations that check the electrical design of a PCB against a set of rules defining physical and electrical design constraints Performing these checks prevent short circuits and process errors The types of design rules are as follows 86 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Clearances Design Rule Type Description The minimum spacing air gaps allowed between two sets of entities in the design These sets can belong to the same type of entity or to different types Electrical Targets certain propertie
178. ected Select Markup File s Lists all Markup files associated with the base file You can password protect single or multiple Markup files Output You can select the output location for the Mobile Pack and also send the file using your default e mail client Password Protected You can password protect the Mobile Pack 4 From the Select Resource File s box select the resource files to include in the Mobile Pack 5 From the Select Markup File s box select the Markup files to include in the Mobile Pack 6 Ifyou wish to password protect the Markup files select the Password check box next to the Markup file a In the Password field enter a password of any length and character b In the Confirm Password field re enter the password Click to close the Password dialog 7 To save the Mobile Pack locally from the Output options specify the location and name a Click Browse to locate the directory where you want to save or in the Save As field enter the file path b Specify a name for the Mobile Pack 8 If you wish to send the Mobile Pack using your default e mail client select the E Mail check box 9 Ifyou wish to password protect the Mobile Pack select the Password Protected check box a In the Password field enter a password of any length and character b In the Confirm Password field re enter the password C Click OK to close the Password dialog 10 Toselect Advanced options such as in
179. ee Also Viewing Details of a Single Entity for more information List Tags Attributes List block attributes and tags See Also Viewing Tags Attributes for more information Entity Information View information of a set of entities See Also Viewing Information for a Set of Entities for more information 47 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Comparing 2D Files AutoVue provides the ability to visually compare two files and display color coded compar ative data When you compare two files AutoVue displays three windows the first containing the original file the second containing the file you compared the original against and the third containing the comparison results In the Comparison Result window you can specify whether you want to display only the additions deletions or unchanged or any combination of the three To access these options right click in any window and select an option from the pop up menu The comparison results are displayed in different colors to differentiate the results of the file comparison The comparison options and corresponding colors are Option Color Description View Additions Green Indicates the something has been added View Deletions Red Indicates that something has been deleted View Unchanged Blue Indicates that there is no change TASK 1 2 View the base file in AutoVue From the Analysis menu s
180. efs 109 Models tab 25 103 part alignment 132 align 134 constraints 133 PMI entities 127 recentering 107 108 entity reference 107 render modes 114 115 sectioning 139 cut options 140 exporting 141 options 140 section plane 141 selecting model parts 106 text markup 261 transformation 135 buttons 136 137 138 reset 138 setting values 139 user defined coordinate system 144 Views tab 26 104 3D dynamic rendering 184 3D Model Tree 25 103 3D rendering 184 3D views 120 camera view 120 default view 120 layers 123 native views 120 perspective 122 user defined view 121 delete 121 view points 122 A About dialog version and buid information 19 archive files 32 arrow style 276 AutoVue 17 basics 19 Client Server deployment 327 Desktop deployment 327 graphical user interface 20 GUI menu bar 20 toolbars 21 AutoVue GUI AutoVue properties toolbar 21 AutoVue toolbar 21 Markup entity toolbar 21 AutoVue Mobile 299 markup policy 305 Mobile Pack 299 create 300 create Markup files 305 update to backend system 309 view 303 AutoVue properties toolbar 21 AutoVue toolbar 21 base font 182 batch print 279 291 Bill of Material BOM 85 Bookmarks tab 23 65 105 build information 19 bylayer 271 C calibrating arc 59 101 169 234 241 248 259 calibrating distance 54 97 166 231 238 245 257 change color markup layer 207 Components tab 24 63 configure 177 2D 183 colors 183 snap settings 183 3D 184 align wit
181. el Tree deselect the check box beside the model part or parts that you want to hide Conversely select the check box beside the model parts that you want to set visible RESULT The selected model parts appear or disappear from the model NOTE You can also hide model parts by selecting them on the model or from the Model Tree then right clicking and selecting Hide Selecting Hide Rest displays the selected model parts and hides the rest of the model 115 WORKING WITH 3D FILES DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES Changing Model Color You can change the color of a specific model part or selected model parts TASK 1 Select the model or model parts whose color you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If no part is selected the change is applied to the entire model 2 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Color ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Color Asl STEP RESULT The Color dialog appears Select the desired color 4 Click Apply RESULT The selected part or parts change to the selected color NOTE To set the model color to its default color repeat steps 1 to 2 and click Reset in the Color dialog Adjusting the Transparency You can adjust the degree of transparency of a model This function only applies to shaded and shaded wire models TASK 1 Select the model or model parts whose transparency you want to adjust 2 From the Manipulate menu sele
182. el or access and create your own views You can also right click in the workspace and then select from the menu See 3D Views 113 WORKING WITH 3D FILES DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES Menu Page Sub Menu Description Next Page Go to the next page of a multi page file From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Previous Page Go to the previous page of a multi page file From the Autovue toolbar you can also click ELI Page Number Go to the specified page of a multi page file From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Display Attributes AutoVue provides several different render methods to display a 3D CAD model You can also adjust the degree of transparency change color or visibility to suit your preferences Render Modes The choice of render mode varies between the level of detail and the render speed of the model For example a shaded model is three dimensional and highly detailed but requires more time to render The different render modes are as follows Method Description Wireframe A skeletal model constructed using lines and curves that represent the model s true edges All internal lines are visible Shaded A solid model constructed of planes and surfaces These surfaces are shaded to increase the illusion of three dimensions Hidden Line A wireframe constructed with all internal lines hidden Silhouette A wireframe constructed with all
183. elect Compare STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to select the file that you want to compare with the current active file Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you apply a change from the View menu all three windows display the synchronized change SrEP RESULT AutoVue displays three windows the first displaying the original file the second displaying the compare file and the third displaying the comparison results To access the Compare options right click in any of the windows ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To maximize any of the windows click the O button on the title bar ofthe window that you want to maximize To minimize click the button To restore the window click the E button STEP RESULT A menu appears displaying the Compare options When comparing AutoCAD files you can view a file without viewports To do so from the View menu select View Without Viewports 48 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES 7 Tomaximize any of the windows double click the title bar of the window that you want to maximize To restore the window double click the title bar 8 To exit Compare mode from the File menu select Exit Compare ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Exit Compare Mode RESULT The original file appears in the workspace Align and Scale You can scale or translate a file in order to compare files accurately Wi
184. elect the entity you want to measure from ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to take more than one measurement from the same starting point select the Fix Position check box STEP RESULT The location of the entity appears in the From lad field 5 Click inside the To lad field to select the entity type that you want to measure to 256 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 6 Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the end point for the measurement STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 7 model select the entity you want to measure to STEP RESULT The location of the entity appears in the To lad field 8 Click again to complete the measurement STEP REsULT The measured line path appears in a value box entity on the current active markup The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and Delta Z appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Dragto move the measured line path 10 Click on the measured line path 11 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 12 Toresize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 13 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance ta
185. ement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities When marking up EDA files in addition to all the markup options available for 2D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode See 2D Specific Markups NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel 241 Markups CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized or deleted You can also modify the font of a measure entity align a free snap measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis as well as add units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the drawing AutoVue provides the option to snap to geometrical or electrical points on the drawing In Markup mode you can choose from several measure options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options Option
186. en select Open STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears 2 Browse to the location of the Mobile Pack avp and then select Open 303 AUTOVUE MOBILE CREATING MARKUP FILES 10 If the Mobile Pack is password protected during creation the Password dialog appears In the Password field enter the password and then click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The native file or streaming file opens in AutoVue with all associ ated XRefs resource files markups and renditions There are certain limitations when loading a streaming file Streaming files do not support blocks or viewing options Streaming file constraints change with each version of AutoVue As a result the streaming file from an earlier version of AutoVue cannot be opened in a later version Streaming files are platform specific Therefore a streaming file created ona Windows platform cannot work on a UNIX platform and vice versa If the Rendition option is selected during the creation of the Mobile Pack from the AutoVue menu bar select Collaborate and then select View Rendition from Mobile Pack ADDITIONAL INFORMATION It is not possible to add markups to a rendition STEP RESULT The rendition appears in a new AutoVue window If there are associated Markups files the Markup Indicator icon appears in the status bar To open the Markup files click the Markup Indicator icon ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the menu bar you can also click Open Markup s
187. en two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP REsULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring Area Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Area tab 3 Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points ona drawing The snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 238 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 10 11 12 13 Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing the snapping modes are disabled From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter In the Net Area R
188. ens 74 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS 2 In the Physical Layers section you can show or hide the following Option Description All physical layers Click the column header One physical layer Select the check box to the left of the layer name You can also select a layer and click Visibility One entity type for all Click the column header For example click the Trace column header to physical layers show or hide all trace entities of all physical layers One entity type for one Click a specific check box physical layer Click Apply to view the changes in the workspace You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set Click Close to close the Layers dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Check boxes for physical layers can have four states checked unchecked gray checked and gray unchecked Check boxes that are checked and gray indicate that the entities of a physical layer are neither all visible nor all hidden Gray unchecked check boxes that you cannot select indicate that there is no entity of that type for that layer Modifying Vis ibility for Logical Layers Use the Layers dialog to hide or display specific logical layers in the workspace TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 55 STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Ifth
189. ent 12 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 249 MARKUPS ADDING TEXT Adding Text With AutoVue you can add a text box entity to a markup TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Text ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Text Click and drag on the drawing to define the dimensions of the text box Click in the text box and enter the text you want to add ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The height of the text box will adjust to accommodate the text To change text box font properties from the Markup menu select Format and then select Font ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective font property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the font type style and size STEP REsULT The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type style and size Click OK to implement the font changes and to close the Font dialog To change the line properties or fill color of the text box select the text box then from the Markup menu select Format and then select the property or properties you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective line property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the line style line thickness fill types and fill colors Right click outside the text area to complete the modification STEP REsULT The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Na
190. ent and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 12 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 13 Toresize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 14 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 Measure an arc in the drawing 2 From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 Fromthe Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 248 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring Minimum Distance Use the Minimum Distance option to measure the minimum distance between entities The available entities for snapping are nets pins vias and traces TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Minimum Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the
191. er click the Order column header Layer Sets A layer set is comprised of all the physical and logical layers in the drawing Layer sets differ in the attributes of the different layers for example z order visibility and color You can also define your own layer sets to control which layers you can view and print Viewing Layer Sets AutoVue lists top bottom and default layer sets as well as any layer set that is stored in the file You can choose to display any layer set you need You can also create user defined layer sets and display them later To view a layer set take the following steps TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 5 STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Fromthe Layer Sets list select the layer set you want to display 77 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYER SETS 3 Click Apply STEP RESULT The selected layer set displays in the workspace 4 Torestore the default layer set from the Layer Sets list select Default Click Close to close the Layers dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also view the layer sets from the Layers list beside the Layers button 5 on the AutoVue toolbar Creating User Defined Layer Sets You can define a layer set and save it for the duration of the session The layer set you defined is added to the Layer Sets list in the Layers dialog an
192. er defined layer sets Click Delete ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The layer settings of the deleted layer set remain displayed on the screen until you select another layer set Click Apply to save the changes Click Close to close the Layers dialog Saving User Defined Layers Sets with Markups You can save user defined layer sets using Markup files TASK T Create custom layer sets 2 From the Markup menu select New ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Markup Z Create any markup entities that you need 4 From the Markup menu select Save As STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears 5 Enterthe markup information and click OK to close the Save Markup File As dialog RESULT The Layer sets you created are saved with the Markup file When you reopen the file during a different session you can view the Layer sets when you open the Markup file See Markups 79 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MANIPULATING EDA ViEWS Manipulating EDA Views As with any 2D file with the View options you can instantly manipulate how the current active file is displayed For example you can rotate a file s orientation clockwise or counter clockwise by 90 degrees and flip a file s orientation horizontally vertically or both simultaneously See 2D Viewing Options for more information on View options AutoVue provides several ways to change the view size of a selected area of
193. erte tente 19 AutoVue Graphical User Interface sso dh Rae por D 20 Menu t d app MP Mop UN ER MEER NUR eS 20 Toolbars o etta sete et Teun Meer n D bt DR DU Dui 21 Navigation Panel stridet ipe ep e d arp mir ge eR gc re a ipo 22 Markup Navigation Trees iaces cust ita REUS i xor E ge ir d Xr WIE E i WD pedir 27 Status Blossom edad adsis ae Mate ds oe an cae asp au any ARR 27 deer deco E N dul du 28 Opening Elles sso os Dot un d En etse Ge bene ab D 28 eei ili s npe ona 28 Openinga UBL sd 29 Opening File from a 29 Opening a File from a Backend DMS 30 Streaming deditio n do SR dodo HE 31 AFCHIVG FINS cn ces enon pesos etc ee M e edm od LAE 32 File Properties caede ORO natif Riso 32 Navigating a Document with Multiple Pages esee eene reete ntnnttnt tato nis 33 Worlang With 249 F a tena pe e E a d d c NR RE RR RR BR 35 Searching Texte cmn gigni avari adire datnr etc uis irri deu fiin 35 DED Viewing 22 Er NM 36 Using the Magnify set 39 Using the Pan and Zoom Windo
194. es ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Mass Properties tab 3 Click Options STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears 4 Tochangethe density enter a value in the Density field To change the density units select the unit for Mass and Length from their respec tive lists in the Units section 6 To apply the density to model parts with unknown density select Use Only for Parts with Unknown Density 125 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES To apply the density to all model parts select Use for All Parts 8 To change the display units select the unit for Mass and Length from their respec tive lists in the Display Units section 9 To compute the inertia tensor based on output coordinate system select Output Coordinate System Origin 10 compute the inertia tensor based on the center of gravity select Center of Gravity 11 Click OK to close the Options dialog STEP RESULT Mass properties are instantly calculated and displayed in the Mass Properties tab When a mass property cannot be calculated N A displays for that property When this is the case you can also click Error Report for a list of mass properties that could not be calculated 12 Tosavethe changes clic
195. es can also include hyperlinks To fire a PMI hyperlink do the following TASK 1 2 From the Model Tree or workspace right click the PMI hyperlink entity From the menu select Follow Hyperlink STEP RESULT The 3D Hyperlink dialog appears if there are multiple hyperlinks associated with the selected PMI entity From the 3D Hyperlink dialog select a link and then click Fire RESULT The selected link opens Manipulating a 3D Model You can rotate 3D CAD models along a specific axis You can scale a model part up and down as well as translate the model In Manipulate Mode you can resize translate and or rotate selected parts of the model When you select one or more model parts AutoVue displays a model size representation of the Global Axes going through the selected part or parts of the 3D model Panning a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Manipulate ode STEP RESULT You are now in Manipulate mode Select the model part or parts that you want to pan ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key while selecting 5 RESULT A model size representation of the Global Axes appears through the model part or parts and are encased by a three dimensional box Click and hold the mouse button on the arrow at the end of the axis that you want to pan
196. es to vector files TASK 1 From the File menu select Convert STEP RESULT The Convert dialog appears 2 Click Pens STEP RESULT The pen Thickness dialog appears 3 Inthe From To section of the Pen Thickness dialog select the Color Index for which you want to modify the thickness ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one Color Index press the Shift or Control keys while selecting 4 Fromthe Units list select the unit in which you want to set the thickness In the Thickness field enter a thickness value 6 Pressthe Enter key STEP RESULT The new thickness value appears beside the selected Color Index in the From To section of the Pen Thickness dialog 7 Tosavethe changes that you made click Save As STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears 8 Enter a file name for the new pen settings 9 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To modify an existing pen setting select the pen setting from the Current Pen Settings list make the changes then click Save STEP REsULT The new pen settings are saved and appear in the Current Pen Settings list 10 Click OK to close the Pen Thickness dialog 297 CONVERSION CHANGING THE PEN SETTINGS 298 AutoVue Mobile AutoVue Mobile provides the ability to view and add markups to files in a disconnected environment Whether you are travelling or need to share files with an external partner you can still view files markups and add new markups Addit
197. esigned to be covered by a layer of copper when manufactured Also known as a metal zone Cross hatching The breaking up of large conductive areas by the use ofa pattern of lines and spaces in the conductive material Datum A specific location a point that serves as a reference to locate a PCB pattern or layer for manufacture Density On a PCB the degree to which components are packed on the board Generally the density is given as the number of square inches per equivalent i e a lower number indicates a more dense board Discrete components Components with three or fewer electrical connections for example resistors or capacitors Electrical check The process of checking the PCB to ensure that the connections they are on match those specified in the net list Fill zone A zone that defines an area to be filled with copper Fine pitch A class of surface mount components that is characterized by pins measuring 0 025 inches or less from pad center to pad center 332 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS Footprint EDA Term Definition The physical description of a component It consists of three elements padstacks representing the pads of the component obstacles representing among other things the physical outline of the component silkscreens keepouts keepins and assembly drawing data and text documenting the footprint information for ex
198. esigns perform intelligent measurements analyze nets and components and much more For information on the available features for EDA files refer to the following sections Navigation Panel The Navigation Panel displays by default on the left hand side of the AutoVue workspace when you view a drawing For example when viewing an EDA drawing it allows you to navigate through a list of component instances nets and the associated pins and net nodes pins connected to a net present in the current schematic drawing or Printed Circuit Board PCB design The columns displayed in the Navigation Panel are determined by the profile of the entity types in the current schematic drawing or PCB design Lists can be sorted in order to group similar component instances 61 WORKING WITH EDA FILES NAVIGATION PANEL You can also use the Navigation Panel to select highlight single or multiple components or entities zoom to a component or entity and query entity information Components Components RefDes Part Type Location 14 BOFPCE 29 0001 C1 1 51 0001 C2 CAPC321 7 00001 C3 CAPC321 7 00001 C4 CAPC321 7 00001 u1 SOP63P 50 0001 U2 SOP63P 50 0001 U3 SSOP5O 50 0001 R4 RESC16 7 00001 R3 RESC16 7 00001 R2 RESC16 7 00001 R1 RESC16 7 00001 RN1 RESCAX 8 00001 RN2 RESCAX 8 00001 RN3 RESCAX 8 00001 RN4 RESCAX 8 00001 J1 MOL 541 30 0001 51
199. esult section of the dialog select Add to cumulate a net area result of different areas To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP REsULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog If you selected Shape click the edge of the predefined shape that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP REsULT The shape is highlighted The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the angle between three points The snapping modes are displayed STEP RESULT The snapping modes are displayed Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 239 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP
200. et You can view the properties of a net via the Show Entity Properties option 70 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES NOTE The Show Entity Properties is disabled when more than one net entity is selected TASK 1 Select an entity such as a pin or trace from the workspace the Navigation Panel STEP RESULT The corresponding net is highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel From the workspace or Navigation Panel right click the selected net and then select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of the selected net Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog Show Net Instances You can display the instances of a net in a multi page file TASK 1 From the Navigation Panel click the Nets tab and select the net you want to view STEP RESULT The net is highlighted in the Navigation Panel and the workspace From the View menu select Go to Net Instances or right clickthe highlighted net from the Navigation Panel or workspace and select Go to Net Instances STEP RESULT AutoVue highlights the instance or instances of the selected net If the selected net appears on multiple pages the Go to Net Instances dialog appears Go to Net Instances Please select page 3 Select the page on which you want to view the net instance then click OK RESULT The selected page is displayed and the
201. f components affixed to a common surface and connected by copper tracks Pin The portion of a component to which an electrical connection can be made Ratsnest A number of unrouted straight line connections between two or more pads that represent the electrical connections in the netlist The ratsnest serves as a reminder that the pads must be connected and that currently there is no track on the board to make that connection Reference designator A character string denoting the type of component and a number that is specific to that component 334 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Routing Definition Placing conductive interconnects between components on a PCB layout The process of turning nets into tracks Schematic A graphical description of an electrical circuit Segment The partial track that exists between two adjacent vertices or between a vertex and a pin Sometimes the track between two pins is also called a segment although connection is usually the more appropriate term here Signal An electrical impulse of a predetermined voltage current polarity and pulse width Silkscreen Text or outlines in ink on the solder mask on the top and sometimes on the bottom of board modules A silkscreen is used for component and identification placement on a PCB and usually includes component outlines reference designators polarity indicat
202. ferent logical layers silkscreen keepout and so on but only the logical layer that defines the actual outline of the component is considered Manufacturing Minimum Annular Ring Specify the minimum distance between the pad outline and the outline of its drill hole on all physical layers NOTE The two outlines geometries are part of the pin pad entity but on different logical layers Minimum Pad Diameter Specify the minimum diameter of a pad NOTE Only applicable to rounded pads 88 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type Design Rule Check Description 8 Acute Angle in Specify the minimum degrees acute angle between connected traces on the same physical layer NOTE Only two traces belonging to the same net are considered 9 Minimum Drill Hole Specify the minimum Size diameter of the drill hole size allowed NOTE Only applicable to rounded pads 10 Maximum Drill Hole Specify the maximum Size diameter of the drill hole size allowed NOTE Only applicable to rounded pads Electrical 7 Maximum Via Count Specify the maximum via count allowed for a net 11 Minimum Width Specify the minimum route trace width allowed in the design 12 Maximum Route Width Specify the maximum route trace width allowed in the design 13 Minimum Route Specify the minimum Length route trace length allowed in the design 14 M
203. for Logical 75 Changing tayer CMO tito e er ena lepus 76 Sorting 5 77 MIR M H 77 Viewing Layer Sets dinde etn rt 77 Creating User Defined Layer 5 78 Deleting User Defined Layer Sets cssssssssssscsssecssccssecsscensecssessscesccsscesuscaseessecsscessesseesuscencerseessees 79 Saving User Defined Layers Sets With Markup 79 Manipulating EDACVIGWS NAR mi e eh Or e 80 VIEW desde ipn Me RN ad und a adiu uM M 80 FPO IEG 80 Cross Probing Between Two or 81 Cross Probing Between 2D and 3D Views of the Same 82 Showing the Net Connectivity when Cross Probing 83 ZOOMING when Cross Probing e ssessssssecsssseessscsessncsscsssssscsssssscsuccaccascescesscsucsuseascsscescssecseesusesscancenseses 83 Comparing a PCB with Artwork a oon oo Hd 84 Generati
204. full view of the file TASK 1 2 3 From the View menu select Magnify Glass Click and hold the left mouse button Move the cursor to the area that you want to magnify ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To view different areas of the file click and drag the mouse STEP RESULT The magnified area appears in the Magnify Glass Right click to exit Magnify Glass view 39 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Using the Pan and Zoom Window The Pan and Zoom Window view option allows a close up view of a particular area of a file while maintaining a full view of the file The Pan and Zoom Window displays a miniature version of the file and has a movable box frame on top of the miniature to indicate the area of the file displayed in the AutoVue workspace NOTE The Pan and Zoom Window option is disabled for text based documents and spread sheets TASK 1 From the View menu select Pan and Zoom Window ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Pan and Zoom Window 148 STEP RESULT The Pan and Zoom window appears displaying a full view of the file 2 From the Options menu select Dynamic to view the changes in real time 3 Toviewa close up of a specific area of the file in the AutoVue workspace minimize the frame box by clicking and dragging the frame handles 4 Toview a different area of the file in the AutoVue workspace click and drag the frame box to the area that you
205. gation Tree select Format and then select Fill Type STEP REsULT The Fill Type dialog appears 3 From the Fill Type list select the fill type that you want for the markup entity Select Solid Fill if you want the fill color to be solid Select Transparent Fill if you want the fill color to be transparent Select No Fill if you do not want any fill color 4 Click OK RESULT The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill type 270 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Changing Fill Color TASK 1 2 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the fill color From the Markup menu select Format and then select Fill Color ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Fill Color Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Fill Color 5 RESULT The Fill Color dialog appears From the Fill Color list select the color that you want for the markup entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer 2 chan ss the markup entity color to the color of the layer it is on and selecting Line Color I assigns the same color as the markup entity s line To define a custom line color from the Line Color list select Custom Color From the Color dialog that appears select a color
206. h current UCS 189 background 188 background gradient 188 background images 188 color 187 dynamic load mesh resolution 186 dynamic rendering 184 frame rate 185 geometry highlight 188 initial visibility 186 loading 185 miscellaneous 189 model 185 PMI filtering 186 PMI initial visibility 186 rendering 184 section highlight 188 selection 190 show global axes 189 tree level 189 base font 182 CAD file options 178 common 187 193 desktop office 194 EDA 190 3D PCB view 192 3D view 194 colors 193 cross probing 193 dim unselected 190 191 highlight entity 190 191 synchronize layers 192 thicken highlighted entity 191 tooltips 191 font paths 181 general options 178 graphic files 194 measurement 182 paths 180 raster files 179 rendering 179 resources 180 XRef paths 180 convert 293 file 296 options 293 PDF 295 pen settings 297 size 295 create markup layer 206 cross probing 80 82 net connectivity 83 two or more EDA files 81 zoom behavior 193 zooming 83 custom color 277 custom line color 274 custom line thickness 275 D delete markup layer 209 markups 267 design verification 86 90 design rule checks 87 exporting results 91 DMS ERP PLM UCM 221 Do Not Disturb 318 drawing information 49 set of entities 51 single entity 50 tag attributes 50 dynamic load mesh resolution 186 E EDA 61 3D views 80 ascend hierarchy 72 BOM 85 comparing PCB 84 cross probing 80 design hierarchy 72 design ve
207. he Assign Host dialog appears From the Users list select the user that you want to assign as host Click OK RESULT The user you selected is now the host of the Collaboration Session 319 REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION Passing Control of a Session to Another User When you initiate a Collaboration Session you are the default Controller of the session until you relinquish control to another user You may grant control to another user any time during the session Once you grant control to another user all other users will auto matically lock their views to the new Controller TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Pass Control STEP RESULT The Grant Control dialog appears 2 From the Users list select the user that you want to grant control to 3 Click OK RESULT The user you selected has control of the Collaboration Session Saving a Session Markup The Host owns the Session Markup and is the only one who can save it TASK 1 At the end of the Collaboration Session from the Markup menu select Save As STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears 2 Enterthe Markup ID ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Markup Information is optional 3 Click OK to save RESULT The session Markup is saved and appears as a markup note entity with the control history and chat transcript 320 REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION Closing a Session Only a Host ca
208. he following notice is applicable U S GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs software databases and related documentation and technical data delivered to U S Government customers are com mercial computer software or commercial technical data pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such the use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract and to the extent applicable by the terms of the Gov ernment contract the additional rights set forth in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software License December 2007 Oracle USA Inc 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications including applications which may create a risk of personal injury If you use this soft ware in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other mea sures to ensure the safe use of this software Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software in dangerous applications This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from third parties Oracle Corporation
209. he line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line thickness Width Pixels Customize the line thickness when Customize is selected in the Line Thickness list When other line thicknesses are selected this field displays its value in pixels but cannot be edited 275 MARKUPS FoRMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Arrow Style Add an arrow head at one or both ends of a markup line entity TASK 1 Select the markup line entity you want to change the arrow style To select multiple markup line entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Arrow Style list select the style of arrow that you want for the markup line entity 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The arrow style changes for the selected markup line entity or entities NOTE Any new markup line entities that you create will have the new arrow style Fill Type Change the transparency for selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to change the fill type To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Fill Type list select the fill type that you want for the markup entity Select Solid Fill if you want the fill color to be solid Select Transparent Fill if you want the fill color to be transparent Select No Fill
210. he unit in which you want to measure the angle Click points on the drawing to define the angle you want to measure The first click defines the starting point of the angle measurement The second click defines the vertex of the angle measurement The third click defines the endpoint of the angle measurement The points are joined by angle arms with an arc connecting them Move the cursor to increase or decrease the radial and arc length Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path angle measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured angle also appears in the Measurement Entities dialog To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles You can click and drag the value box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius center and diam eter TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc a STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Arc Info Length list select the unit in which you wantto measure the arc 233 MARKUPS 2D SPEciFIC MARKUPS 3 From the Mea
211. her than a view point From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Perspective The depth of the model changes Viewing a Model from a Particular View Point To view a model from a particular point you can specify a view point TASK 1 From the View menu select Camera Views and then select View Points ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Camera Views and then select View Points STEP RESULT The View Point dialog appears 2 Enterthe coordinates for X Y and Z a In the Camera Position fields enter the coordinates to determine the position of the camera lens b In the Target Position fields enter the coordinates to determine the position of the 3D model viewed through the camera lens In the Up Direction fields change the coordinates to values between 0 and 1 to determine the upward orientation 3 Click OK to close the View Point dialog RESULT The entity moves to the defined view point The Global axes and the User Coordi nates System change position to reflect the view point 122 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Configuring Layers Use this option to configure which layers to display from the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 5 STEP RESULT The Select the Layers to
212. hronize Mobile Pack Select Markup File s CSI DocTitle CSI DocID Select Properties Modified value Original Value Current DMS Value The Select Markup File s list displays the markups that can be imported back to the backend system To select a Markup file to import select the corresponding check box The Select Properties list displays new properties if a new Intellistamp is added STEP RESULT The modified value original value and current DMS value appear in their respective columns The modified value contains the new Intellistamp properties for the Mobile Pack The original value contains the Intellistamp properties in the backend system when the Mobile Pack was created The current DMS value lists current values in the backend system 309 AUTOVUE MOBILE UPDATING FROM MOBILE PACK 4 Toselect a property to update from the Select Properties list select the corre sponding check box 5 Click Update RESULT The Markup files and attributes in the backend system updates from your local Mobile Pack 310 Real Time Collaboration The real time collaboration option enables multiple users to review files interactively and simultaneously thereby shortening the review process for documents Participants in a Collaboration Session assume different roles Each Collaboration Session has a Host a Controller and one or more users These participants have varying privi
213. id edges arc centers faces or any combination of these entity types Minimum Distance Measure minimum distance between any two vertices edges mid edges arc centers faces or any combination of these entity types Edge Length Measure the precise length of a edge Face Surface Measure the precise surface area Vertex Coordinates Provide the coordinates of each vertex 3D Snapping Modes Snapping modes allow you to select or snap to different entity types on a model For example if you select Vertex all vertices are highlighted and a snap box appears when you move the cursor over a vertex Snapping modes allow you to snap to the following entities NOTE The behavior of snapping modes change in regards to the selected measurement option For example the behavior of arc center is not the same for distance and minimum distance Button Vertex 04 Description Highlights vertices on the model Behavior A snap box appears when you hover the mouse pointer over a vertex Edge Line gy Highlights edges on the The edge is highlighted when you hover the mouse model pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the finite edge is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite edge is selected Edge Middle Highlights edges on the The edge is highlighted and a tooltip appears indicating Q model the middle edge coordinate when you hover the mouse pointer Arc
214. iew hundreds of different file formats and to create markups for all its readable file formats without the document s authoring application Marking up refers to drawing and writing on an electronic document When you create a markup for a file the markup is created on top of the original file Markups are saved in separate files NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel If a file has existing Markup files the Markup Indicator icon 2 appears in the status bar at the bottom of the Auto Vue workspace Clicking the Markup Indicator opens the Markup Files dialog and allows you to select the Markup files to display Markup Files 0 2006 002 C lacad2006 001 When you open a Markup file AutoVue layers the markup over the original file In Markup mode you can e Create entities such as text arcs boxes circles clouds lines arrows and polygons Adda stamp or information to an entity by adding a text or a note e Create name and color layers to organize your work Create a new Markup file that combines copies of selected layers of different Markup files 197 MARKUPS MARKUP NAVIGATION TREE Create measurement markup entities that can be moved or resized Navigate markups through a hierarchy tree view markup properties and sort the tree according to each property View markup layers individually or in combination NOTE By default
215. iewing Mobile Packs DU RIO o 303 Creating Markup dto ratto ip eoa n rA RM tp FN pi ai 304 Defining Markup Policy iunctura 305 Updating from Mobile Pack tet reiten rte five tig Du v os Rhe ere UT 308 Real Time COMO AEN OU Im 311 Collaboration 311 2 to E EE 312 Iidem 312 EE EE TR IR RUE E TAE 312 KIDS ORV ER gest 313 COSI Ellen aac dota apnea nd inda UO 313 ERR MERC M TIME ON DT MEME 313 SESSION INMORMALION a os Dt in aniline Cru 314 Sess LK Nar KO Deo n docti ausim ne Rt baie eso nian piov s cr etu 314 Aarau 314 Collabofation SessSlO Du 314 Initiating a Collaboration SESSION scssssssesesseeseessesscsncssessscsccssssecsncenccsscescesecseecuscaceasesseeseeseeens 315 Changing a User s Layer Color of a S SSION sssssssssssssesecsscssecseecsscensceseccseccsccssecsucesseeseeensessees 316 Adding New Users TO 4705 1116 316 Opening a Markup While Initiating a Session essere ntentnnn tette ntenne 317 Opening a Markup During a Session eese tentent 317 Joining d SCSSION a a eitra RSE aE 3
216. if you do not want any fill color 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill type 276 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Fill Color Change the line color fill color and fill type for a selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to change the fill color To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Fill Color list select the color that you want for the markup entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer changes the markup entity color to the color of the layer Defining a Custom Color To define your own color take the following steps TASK 1 From the Fill Color list select Custom Color 7 STEP RESULT The Color dialog appears 2 Selecta color and click OK STEP RESULT The fill color changes for the selected markup entity or entities 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill color Markup Layers You can move selected markup entities to a specific layer the markup entities will inherit the properties of the layer TASK 1 From the Markup Layer list select th
217. ight Alt Up arrow Alt Down arrow Alt drag up down or Mouse middle button click and drag up down Move up down Elevation Alt Left arrow Alt Right arrow Alt drag left right or Mouse middle button click and drag left right Side step left right Ctrl Up arrow Ctrl Down arrow Ctrl click and drag up down Look up down Ctrl Left arrow Ctrl Right arrow Ctrl click and drag left right Rotate Alt double click Places camera perpendicular to selected plane Adding Markups in Walkthrough Mode When walking through a 3D model you can add a Note markup entity NOTE The Note markup entity is the only markup supported in Walkthrough mode TASK 1 From the Markup menu select New ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click New Markup 27 STEP RESULT AutoVue enters Markup mode 2 Create a Note markup entity See Adding a Note for more information on how to create Note markup entities ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can continue walking through the model while creating new Note markup entities 3 Save your new markups See Saving a New Markup File for more information STEP RESULT The markups are saved 174 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH To exit Markup mode from the Markup menu select Close All To view the 3D model s associated Markup files select Open from the Mar
218. ighted Click the geometrical point on the selected model part STEP RESULT The geometrical point is highlighted and the Fixed arrow 215 enabled Click Vertex 123 or Face to select the type of geometrical point you want to click on the model part to remain fixed Click the geometrical point on the model Click Apply ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To remove a constraint select the Constraint that you want to remove then click Remove To remove all part alignments click Remove All 5 RESULT The model part is aligned according to the selected options The Constraint Type and the types of geometrical points aligned appear under Constraints section of the dialog Click Close to close the Part Alignment dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A prompt will appear if you did not apply the changes before clicking Close To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Transforming a 3D Model Using the illustrated transformation buttons or by entering X Y or Z values you can rotate scale or translate a model or any selection of model parts From the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Define 135 WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL The Transformation dialog appears as follows Transformation sep TE gt Ready Rotate Degree
219. ightness of the model s reflection to light respec tively Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To set the light properties to its default setting select Default STEP RESULT The light properties modifications are applied Click Close to close the Lighting dialog Removing a Light Source TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears Right click directly on the small ball that you want to remove and select Remove Light STEP RESULT The small ball disappears and the light change is reflected You can also select Default to restore the lighting properties to its default setting Click Close to close the Lighting dialog 119 WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D ViEWS 3D Views You can display different views of 3D Models or create your own views The following sections provide information on the default view of the model the available camera views native views and user defined views Default View The Default View is the view of the model when it is initially loaded usually it is the view in which the model was saved In cases where there is no saved view Auto Vue loads isometric view of the model Setting Standard or Camera Views Rather than entering Rotation mode you can view various predefined rotations with the Camera Views option from View and Markup modes To do so from the View menu select Camera Views and then se
220. ile and displays it in the Magnify Window See Using the Magnify Window for more information Pan and Zoom Window Display a close up view ofa particular area of a file while maintaining a view of the entire file From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click 6 NOTE The Pan and Zoom Window option is disabled for text based documents and spreadsheets See Using the Pan and Zoom Window for more information 38 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Menu Pan Sub Menu Description Click and drag to move the drawing To exit right click From the Auto Vue toolbar you qf can also click 7 NOTE The Rotate option is disabled Rotate Rotate Clockwise Rotate Counter Clockwise for archived files text based documents and spreadsheets Rotate the file 90 degrees clockwise From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Rotate the file 90 degrees counter clockwise From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click 90 Using the Magnify Glass Flip Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis Flip the drawing on its horizontal axis From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click A Flip the drawing on its vertical axis From the Auto Vue toolbar you En can also click gt The Magnify Glass view option displays the magnified area at the cursor location You can view the details of a selected area of a file while maintaining a
221. ile Pack 299 305 update to backend system 309 Model tab 25 103 Model Tree 25 103 108 109 110 hiding 110 XRefs 109 Models tab 25 103 N native print settings 286 Navigation Panel 22 61 66 Bookmarks tab 23 65 105 Components tab 24 63 customizing 62 Models tab and Model 25 103 Models tab and Model Tree 25 103 Nets tab 24 64 Views tab 26 104 net connectivity 70 Nets tab 24 64 offline files 327 manage 327 remove 329 offline mode 327 328 offline mode offline files 327 open file 28 Markup file 202 Oracle AutoVue 17 pan and zoom window 40 partial print preview 289 pen settings 288 PMl entities 127 aligning 128 configuring 129 captures 129 reference frames 129 views 129 filtering 128 go to 128 hyperlinks 130 PMI filtering 186 PMI initial visibility 186 print 279 batch print 291 file 290 header footer 283 286 add 284 margins 282 set 283 options 279 configure 282 partial preview 282 289 pen settings 288 create 289 delete 289 preview a file 290 watermarks 286 add 287 Q Quick Menus 28 R real time collaboration 311 chat window 323 send message to selected users 324 Collaboration Session 311 Collaboration user tree 311 Controller 312 Host 312 Lock View to Presenter 312 Observer 313 Pointer 313 session 314 add new users 316 assign host 319 close session 321 initiate 315 invite users 318 join 318 layer color 316 leave collaboration session 323 L
222. ile you want to open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you select more than one Markup file the Active Markup menu lets you select which one of them is initially active See Setting the Active Markup File for more information Click OK RESULT The selected markup or markups appear in the workspace on top of the original file NOTE When you select more than one Markup file the markups display simultaneously Saving an Existing Markup File To save a modified existing Markup file from the Markup menu select Save NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Save Markup Ld If you have multiple markups open that you have modified and want to save them all from the Markup menu select Save All To save an existing markup as a new markup from the Markup menu select Save As Importing a Markup File To import a Markup file on top of the original file TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open Markup s STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears Click Import STEP RESULT The Select Markup File to Import dialog appears 203 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES 3 4 Navigate to the markup file that you want to import and select it Click Open RESULT The imported Markup file appears in the workspace on top of the original file Exporting a Markup File To export a Markup file TASK 1 Fr
223. implemented on the client machine If the administrator is unable to resolve the issue please contact Oracle Corp If at any time you have questions or concerns regarding AutoVue call or e mail us General Inquiries Telephone 1 514 905 8400 or 1 800 363 5805 http www oracle com autovue index html Sales Inquiries Telephone 1 514 905 8400 or 1 800 363 5805 E mail autovuesales_ww oracle com 353 FEEDBACK CUSTOMER SUPPORT Customer Support Web Site http www oracle com autovue index html 354
224. indicates that a missing resource has been substituted for another resource 3 Click OK to close the Properties dialog Adding an Overlay When working with 2D vector files you can overlay other files over the current active file You can also adjust an overlay move an overlay and scale an overlay by defining the X and Y coordinates and the scaling factor NOTE When working with a raster file it should be used as the base file because raster formats are opaque and would hide files underneath them TASK 1 Open the file that you want to use as the base file for the overlay 2 From the File menu select Import File as Overlay STEP RESULT The Overlays dialog appears 3 Click Add File STEP RESULT The Please Select an Overlay File dialog appears 4 Select a file to overlay and then click Open 44 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES 5 Toadd another file repeat steps through 4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can hide display certain overlays by selecting deselecting corresponding check boxes in the Visibility column 6 When done click OK to close the Overlays dialog RESULT The base file is displayed with the selected overlay files on top of it Modifying an Overlay TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Overlays STEP RESULT The Modify Overlay dialog appears Select the overlay that you want to modify Click the Action that you want to apply to the overlay Click M
225. information on how to select enti ties from the workspace Navigation Panel and the Entity Search dialog To specify which types of entities you can or cannot select use the Entity Filter dialog See Filtering Entity Types for more information on the Entity Filter dialog Once an entity is selected you can zoom to it in the workspace and perform other opera tions with the EDA file 65 WORKING WITH EDA FILES SELECTING ENTITIES From the Navigation Panel To select an entity from the Navigation Panel perform the following steps To make select click any component net associated pin or net node in the Navigation Pane To select more than one entity press the Shift or Control key while selecting The selected entity or entities are highlighted in the workspace If the selected entity is small a flash box appears indicating the location of the highlighted entity in the workspace See Zooming to a Selected Entity From the Workspace To select an entity from the workspace perform the following steps Click an entity in the workspace to select it To select more than one entity press the Shift or Control key while selecting The selected entity or entities appear highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel If the selected entity is small a flash box appears indicating the location of the high lighted entity in the workspace You can also apply selection filters when selecting entities in the
226. ing AutoVue provides a variety of flexible user friendly entities To name a few there are circles clouds polygons and leaders You can also attach text to entities insert a note for longer comments add attach ments or add a stamp such as a company logo In addition you can create measurement markup entities and hyperlinks that link between the current file and other associated files or applications AutoVue Basics This section introduces the basics of working in AutoVue such as starting and exiting AutoVue the help menu changing the locale of AutoVue displaying file versions informa tion and the AutoVue graphical user interface GUI The section on the AutoVue GUI discusses the included menu bars tool bars navigation panel and navigation tree AutoVue Version Information The About dialog displays AutoVue version and build information You can also view the version build number and build date of components that are shipped with AutoVue You can also export this information into a text file Viewing Version and Build Information To view product version information TASK 1 From the Help menu select About STEP RESULT The About dialog appears and displays the AutoVue version number and build date 2 To view version and build information for components click Version Info 3 export the version information click Export STEP RESULT The Export dialog appears 4 Navigate and select the direc
227. ing the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring Vertex Coordinates The Vertex Coordinates option provides the coordinates of vertices on the model TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure SrEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 169 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES 2 Click the Vertex tab 5 RESULT All vertices on the model are highlighted From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure 4 Move the cursor over the highlighted vertex that you want to measure STEP RESULT The X Y and Z coordinates appear in a tooltip 5 Select the vertex ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The X Y an Z coordinates appear in the Measurement dialog 6 Click Close the close the Measurement dialog Measuring the Length of an Edge Use the Edge Length option to measure the length of any edge on the model TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar yo
228. ining Scope dialog appears Defining Scope Scope Current Schematic Page Entire Schematic Design Select Current Schematic Page to browse through only one page Select Entire Schematic Design to browse through all schematic pages 92 WORKING WITH EDA FILES SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEARCH Click OK after making your selection The Entity Search dialog appears Entity Search Entity Types Attributes Attribute Name AddFiler Value v Entity Types Net Name Pin List Net Class 1 81 12 41 Unclassed IC9 5 1 12 8 Unclassed 1 9 21 12 11 Unclassed 1 5 21 11 101 Uncelassed 1C11 41C8 4 IC Unclassed EC1 10 041 5 Unclassed R31BR4204 lnclassed EC1 3 1 Unclassed 1 13 9 1 0 Unclassed 1 15 9 2 0 Unclassed 1 11 A320 Unclassed 1 11 11 11 31 Unclassed Fri 21711 13 I Inclassed gt Attribute Performing an Entity Type based Search The following steps describe how to perform an entity type based search TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search AQ STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears Click the Entity Types tab From the Entity Types list select an entity type ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To sort the list by attribute click the attribute column heading that you want to sort by STEP RES
229. instance of the selected net is highlighted 71 WORKING WITH EDA FILES NAVIGATING DESIGN HIERARCHY Navigating Design Hierarchy AutoVue supports navigation through the hierarchical structure of a schematic drawing A hierarchical block in a schematic is a symbol that refers to a child schematic Navigating using Ascend Hierarchy With the Ascend Hierarchy option you can navigate from the child schematic to the parent page On the child page of your schematic s design hierarchy right click an entity in the work space or in the Navigation panel and select Ascend Hierarchy AutoVue returns to the parent page If you select an entity that has multiple parents the Ascend Hierarchy dialog appears displaying the parent pages Select the Parent page you want to go to then click OK AutoVue returns to the selected parent page Ascend Hierarchy Please select page 15 Channel CD Data Flow 17 Channel Data Flow 18 Channel EF Data Flow 20 Channel GH Data Flow NOTE You can also select the entity in the Entity Search dialog then right click and select Ascend Hierarchy Layers When working with EDA files AutoVue lets you view all the physical layers and associated logical layers of the EDA drawing you can view all layer sets for that file or create your own Additionally from the Layers option you can manipulate certain layer attributes 72 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS such as visibility
230. ion Panel are determined by the profile of the entity types in the current schematic drawing or PCB design Lists can be sorted in order to group similar component instances 22 AUTOVUE Basics AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE You can also use the Navigation Panel to select highlight single or multiple components or entities zoom to a component or entity and query entity information Components va Components RefDes Part Type Location 14 23 0001 C1 CAPAE1 51 0001 C2 CAPC321 7 00001 C3 CAPC321 7 00001 C4 CAPC321 7 00001 ul 50 0001 u2 SOP63P 50 0001 U3 550 50 50 0001 5 SSOP50 50 000 R4 RESC16 7 00001 R3 RESC16 7 00001 R2 RESCIE 7 00001 R1 RESC16 7 00001 RESCAX 9 00001 RN2 RESCAX 9 00001 RN3 RESCAX 9 00001 RN4 RESCAX 8 00001 MOL 541 30 0001 51 Sw SNA 11 0001 52 Sw 5 49 0001 J2 5 23 000 DISPLAY 7SEGSMD 29 0001 gt Component Pins Name Location 05 1 47 1500 false U5 2 47 1500 false U5 3 47 1500 false U5 4 47 1500 false 05 5 47 1500 false U5 6 47 1500 false Bookmarks Tab The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views Draft views 2D plans 3D Views ofan EDA design or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as PDF Bookmark
231. ionally when connected you can update your backend DMS PLM ERP UCM system with edits you make offline Using the AutoVue Mobile feature in AutoVue you can create a Mobile Pack a packaged file that contains the base file all the external resources fonts XRefs needed to fully display the file and existing markups for the file The streaming files and renditions can also be included when creating the Mobile Pack Once a Mobile Pack is created you can view your drawing and markups by viewing the Mobile Pack You can create new markups consolidate them with existing markups into one markup or create a master Markup file that loads up automatically when you view the Mobile Pack In a disconnected environment depending on the markup policy defined during Mobile Pack creation you can add markups using AutoVue Desktop Version or the Desktop deployment of AutoVue Markup policies define whether or not users can create save new or existing markups modify delete DMS only existing markups or automatically upload markups When you have access to your backend system from AutoVue you can update all the markups into the backend system These markups are imported into the system and are associated with the base file from which you originally created the Mobile Pack The following sections provide details on creating a Mobile Pack creating markups in AutoVue Mobile understanding markup policies and updating Markup files from Mobile Pack
232. is selected 189 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES Option Description Highlight Bounding Box Selection is enclosed in a wireframe box Highlight Entity Selection is indicated by changing color Walkthrough The following Walkthrough options let you configure the view to use when you enter walk through mode and to control whether or not you want to see the Walkthrough dialog at startup Option Description Restore Last View Select this option to save the last view of the model before exiting walkthrough mode As a result when you re enter walkthrough mode the last view displays Show Walkthrough dialogon Select this option if you want the Walkthrough dialog to display when startup you start walkthrough mode Clear this option if you do not want to see the Walkthrough dialog on startup Configuring AutoVue for EDA Files There are configuration options that allow you to customize your work environment when working with EDA files To access the EDA configuration options from the Options menu select Configure In the Configuration dialog that appears select EDA in the tree Customizing Selections Configure how you want selected components to be highlighted From the Configuration tree select EDA There are two selection options Highlight Entity and Dim Unselected 190 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES Highlight Entity Activate th
233. is created on the server and is maintained for the duration of the Collaboration Session When you initiate a session you become the Host and the Controller of the session TASK 1 2 10 11 Open the file that you want to collaborate on From the Collaborate menu select Start Collaboration Session STEP RESULT The Initiate Session dialog appears In the Session Subject field enter a session name If you want to open a Markup for the Collaboration Session click Browse and browse and select the markup you want to open Select Public if you want the Collaboration Session visible to others who may want to join the session Select Private if you want the Collaboration Session only visible to the partici pants If you want to set a password for the Collaboration Session enter a Password then enter it again to Confirm ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Private and chose not to set password when you click OK a confirmation dialog appears asking if you are sure you do not want to seta password From the Users list select the users that you want to invite ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Users list shows all users connected to the AutoVue server Click Add ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To remove a user select the user from the Invited list and click Remove STEP RESULT The user you selected appears in the Invited list To designate a user as an Observer select the check box under Invited Click OK RESULT
234. is option to highlight all entities that you select This option is enabled by default NOTE The default highlight color is yellow See Also Modifying Colors Dim Unselected Activate this option to dim all the entities that are not selected Selected entities retain their original entity color From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Dim Unselected 3 When you select Dim Unselected you can set the dimness level for entities that are not selected Drag the slider to the right to increase the dimness level and to the left to decrease the dimness level The icon to the right of the dimness settings in the Configuration dialog lets you preview the dimness level Additionally with Dim Unselected you can select the Thicken Highlighted Entity check box This option makes the selected entity appear more pronounced Deselect the check box to return the entity to its default thickness Displaying Tooltips When you hover the mouse over an entity a tooltip appears to show you information about the entity You can disable or enable these tooltips When the option is selected AutoVue automatically retrieves the entity information from the server Clear this option if you do not want this behavior every time your mouse hovers over an entity TASK 1 From the tree select EDA 2 Under the Mouse Hover heading select or deselect the Show Entity Information Tooltip option 3 Click OK 191 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFI
235. ition 1 and X Y and Z coordinates for Position 2 appear in the Measurement dialog To take another measurement click Reset Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 167 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between any three vertices or any two edges planes faces or any combination of these entity types TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure ia STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Angle tab 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT Entities of the selected types are highlighted on the model 4 To measure the angle between an entity type and a plane select the With Plane check box and then select the plane from the list From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 6 Click two points on the model to define the angle STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them 7 Clickagain to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The angle is highlighted and the value of the angle measurement appears in the dialog 8 To take another measurement click Reset Measuring an Arc Use Arc option to measure the precise radius length and angles of any arc on the model You can also calculate the center point location TASK 1 From the An
236. ity Tree 6 Right click the workspace to complete the Intellistamp placement 220 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Viewing Modifying Intellistamp Attributes You can view the attributes of an Intellistamp by double clicking the Intellistamp markup entity The DMS Attributes dialog appears listing all attributes of the Intellistamp DMS Attributes To edit the value double click on it Name Value Value from DMS title Administrator keywords IM unknown IM unknown modifier 2009 05 27 08 01 5 Administrator NOTE All attributes tagged hidden also display in the Attributes dialog The dialog contains three columns that include attribute values defined in the design stage Name column displays the attribute name as defined in the design stage It will either display the backend DMS ERP PLM UCM system defined attribute name or the user defined name Value column displays the assigned value If the attribute is not marked as read only in the design stage you can modify the value Value from DMS column displays the value assigned from the backend system Intellistamp in a DMS ERP PLM UCM System Integration If you view the Intellistamp markup entity in AutoVue with a backend system integration the Commit Changes and Reset buttons appear in the DMS Attributes dialog Click the Commit Changes button to upload the changes made to the DMS Attri butes dialog to the
237. k Raster Full Resolution Fit To Window Rendering C Enable Look Ahead Resources Resolve Local Resources 2 From the Configuration tree select General RESULT The CAD Raster and System Options appear Configuring Options for CAD Files Configure how you want to display text dimensions line styles and so on for CAD files 178 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS Option Description Text Select to display text entities Clear to hide text entities Dimensions Select to display all dimensional entities Clear to hide simple dimension entities Line Weights Select to display varying line thicknesses Clear to make all lines appear equal with a width of 1 pixel No line weights display for any line Force to Black Select to force all colors of a drawing to black Clear to display the file in color Line Style Select to display dotted and dashed lines Clear to display all lines as solid Filling Select to display filled entities as filled rather than just an outline Clear to hide filling for filled entities Load External References Select to display Xrefs automatically Clear to keep Xrefs from displaying automatically Raster Files Choose how you want the raster file to display Select Full Resolution to display raster files at full resolution Select Fit to Window to display raster files to fit the current window Rendering When Enable
238. k Save As STEP REsULT The Save Mass Properties As dialog appears 13 Specify the path where you wantto store the file and enter the file name then click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a txt file 14 Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog Viewing Extents The Extents tab displays the orientation coordinates and center coordinates of the X Y and Z axes as well as the width height and depth measurements for any model or selection TASK 1 Select the part or parts for which you want to view Extents To select multiple parts press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 To view the Extents of the entire 3D model make sure no parts are selected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also make your selection after you open the Entity Prop erties dialog 3 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Show Entity Properties dialog appears 4 Click the Extents tab 126 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PMI ENTITIES 5 You have three extents options a Select Transformed if you want to view the extents after you have transformed the model b Select UnTransformed if you want to view the extents of the model without trans formation c Select Oriented if you wa
239. k three points on the drawing to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordi nates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog If you selected Arc Entity click the edge of the arc that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEPRESULT Thearcis highlighted The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 59 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 60 Working with EDA Files In addition to all the features that are available for generic 2D files AutoVue also provides intelligent querying for EDA files you can create modify layer sets generate BOM verify EDA d
240. k where a model part or set of model parts interfere with another model part or set of model parts Performing an Interference Check TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Check for Interference STEP RESULT The Interference Checking dialog appears From the Scope options select the type of interference check that you want to perform If you selected Set Against the Rest or Set Against Itself select one or more model parts on the model or from the Model Tree ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To clear the last set of selected model parts click Clear STEP RESULT The model parts appear in the Selected Set list and are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree If you selected Set 1 Against Set 2 click the Set 1 arrow then select one or more model parts on the model or from the Model Tree ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To cleara selected part press the Control key and click on the part on the model To clear the last set of selected model parts click Clear STEP RESULT The model parts appear in the Set 1 list and are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree 149 WORKING WITH 3D FILES INTERFERENCE CHECKS 5 Click the Set 2 arrow 2 then select one or more model parts on the model or from the Model Tree STEP RESULT The model parts appear in the Set 2 list and are highlighted in a different color
241. kend system user For the Desktop deployment of AutoVue the operating system user name is assigned to the attribute For the Client Server deployment of AutoVue the user session name is assigned to the attribute date The current date and time is assigned to the attribute To prevent users from modifying the attribute select the Read Only check box To hide the attribute from appearing on the Intellistamp select the Hidden check box However the attributes are viewable from the DMS Attributes dialog When you are done adding an attribute click Add STEP RESULT The Add New Attribute dialog closes and the new attribute is added to the Attributes area The attribute displays as a resizable box in the Preview window To change the value of an existing attribute from the Attributes list select the attribute and then select a new value from the Default Value box To remove an attribute from the Attributes list select the attribute and then click Remove ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add another attribute repeat steps 5 through 10 To change the position of the attribute box in the preview window you can either click and drag the box or enter the X Y coordinates in the Position fields ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Position fields take values between 0 and 1 where 0 0 is the default setting To enlarge the preview click Zoom In STEP RESULT The Zoom In dialog appears This dialog provides an enlarged version of the op
242. kup menu See Opening Markup Files for more information ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Note markup entities appear in the Markup Entity tree but not in the workspace To view the markups double click the Note entities in the Markup Entity tree STEP RESULT The markups open and the Note markup icon 4 appears in the workspace 175 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH 176 Configuring AutoVue Use the configuration options to configure the AutoVue workspace for different groups of file formats or for all files in general For example you can set different background colors for EDA 2D 3D or Office files You can also set paths to locate external resources such as fonts symbols XRefs or configure measurement options To access the configuration options from the Options menu select Configure The Configuration dialog appears To implement your changes and to close the Configuration dialog click OK 177 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS General Options To access the General configuration options TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure Configuration Paths Font Paths Measurement Base Font Colors Model PMI Colors Background Miscellaneous 29 36 EDA Analysis Colors Graphics Desktop Office STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears CAD Text Line Style Dimensions Filling Line Weights Load External References C Force to blac
243. l 2 5 die eta MS beris 112 Display ACEI UNOS coe og oct pee dioi ioa dica teil ea ede ec impe d 114 R nder Modes ecce 114 Changing tbe 80 115 Ghanging olo dado dust adque T ge do dede rt EU EIER 116 Adjusting the 116 Light Setti dini ENS at emiad 117 Ambient iere tee 117 Setting Directional UOS RUOTE RR RU EUROS 118 Addingia New Light SOURCE uote resteatiatet i dera decd EHI 118 Changing the Light Properties ios doti 119 Removing a Light SOULCE cccsssesssssesssssscssscsscsnssssssucssscssssscssscsucsuscaccsscsscesscsscsuscascsuccecsssesscsnsencensess 119 BED MWS C 120 Default VIEW NE ERE RERUMS 120 Setting Standard or Camera Views sees eee etetnnttnn testen tentent ntns tosta tests sonne 120 Setting Native citri te eodera eaa decet cue A edens 120 Creating a User Defined 121 Deleting a User Defined 121 Displaying the Perspective Projection
244. lable Quick Menu options depend on the location where you right click Opening Files You can open base files and Markup files from the File menu and Markup menu respec tively Opening a Local File TASK 1 From the File menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open File e SrEP REsULT The File Open dialog appears 28 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES 2 Browseto locate the file that you want to open 3 Click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace Opening a URL You can open a file by specifying the URL TASK 1 From the File menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open File c STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 From the left panel click Web URL In the File name field enter the URL HTTP or FTP of the filepath 4 Click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace Opening a File from a Server To open a file from a server the server directory must be configured from the AutoVue server side Refer to the Installation and Administration Manual information on setting up server directories using VueServer ini TASK 1 From the File menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open File c STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 29 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES 2 From the left panel click Se
245. large the value box To remove the highlighted vertices on the model click Close in the Measurement Entities dialog Adding Text With AutoVue you can add a 3D text box entity to a markup TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Text ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click 3D Text F The Attach To dialog appears and provides six snapping options ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 261 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Option Description None Does not snap to the model Vertex Snaps to a vertex on the model Edge Snaps to an edge on the model Face Snaps to a face on the model Mid Edge Snaps to the middle of an edge on the model Ar Center Snaps to the center point of an arc on the model 3 Toinsertatext box that snaps to a part of the drawing with a leader line select one of the snapping modes 4 Click and drag on the drawing to define the dimensions of the text box Click in the text box and enter the text you want to add ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The height of the text box will change to accommodate the text 6 change text box font properties from the Markup menu select Format and then select Font ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective font property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the font type style and size STEP RESULT The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type st
246. lect Show Chat Window ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Collaborate status bar you can also click Show Chat Window STEP RESULT The Chat dialog appears Select Selected users STEP RESULT A list of Users appear in the Chat dialog Under Users select the user or users that you want to send the message to ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one user press the Shift or Control key while selecting In the Send Message to field enter your message Click Send RESULT The private message is sent to the selected users of the Collaboration Session Sending a Message to All Users TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Show Chat Window ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Collaborate status bar you can also click Show Chat Window STEP RESULT The Chat dialog appears Select All Users 324 REAL TIME COLLABORATION CHAT WINDOW 3 Inthe Send Message to field enter your message 4 Click Send RESULT The message is sent to all users in the Collaboration Session 325 REAL TIME COLLABORATION CHAT WINDOW 326 AutoVue in Offline Mode The offline mode option in AutoVue provides you with the ability to view and markup files when you do not have access to the AutoVue server or backend DMS system NOTE Going offline is supported from windows based clients only This functionality is also only available when for the Client Server deployemnt of AutoVue Many AutoVue u
247. lect the pre defined view you want to display The view options are Isometric Top Bottom Front Back Left and Right The model changes to the selected view You can also click the Views tab then click the view from the Standard Views tree or right click in the workspace and select Camera Views Setting Native Views AutoVue displays views for a 3D file as saved in its native application Native views are present only if the file contains saved views From the View menu select Views and then select Native Views The model re orients to the selected view The view options vary depending on the file Examples of the view options are Last Saved View Presentation Front Back Left Right Top Bottom Isometric Trimetric and Dimetric You can also click the Views tab and then click the view from the Native Views tree or right click in the workspace and select Views and then select Native Views 120 WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D ViEWS Creating a User Defined View You may want to create and save your own views AutoVue allows you to define a view and add it to the User Defined Views You can define a customized view in View or Markup mode Any views you apply to displayed models during Markup mode are saved as part of the Markup file TASK 1 Apply your own views or transformation to the displayed model ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The view states that you can apply and save for your defined view are Extents Rotation
248. lected area See Area in non Vector Files Area in Vector Files Angle Measure the angle between selected points See Angle in non Vector Files Angle in Vector Files Arc Measure an arc entity See Arc in non Vector Files Arc in Vector Files 2D Vector Snapping Modes The available snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical points on a drawing For example if you select Snap to End Point and you move the cursor over an end point of a line the end point will be highlighted by a snap box The snapping modes allow you to snap to the mid center and end points of an entity XJ Center point Button Snap to Description ad End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near a linear components end point Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point ofa linear component Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an elliptical component x Free snap Allow snapping at any point on the drawing NOTE When selecting a snapping mode you also have the option to select all snapping modes All On or to turn off snapping modes All Off The below table lists snapping locations for certain measurements Area Measurement Snapping Location Snaps to a shape on the drawing Arc Snaps to a
249. leges during the Collaboration Session Collaboration User Tree When you are in a Collaboration Session the panel on the left displays the Users tab in addition to the tabs displayed when you are normally viewing a file The Users tab displays the Username the Layer Color representing the user the In Session value and the user Status File Edit View Manipulate Analysis Markup Collaborate 2 27 27 lg soe gt ER Ad X Username Layer Color In Session Status Mary Gerard Administrator 27 Models Views Users 311 REAL TIME COLLABORATION THE Host The Host The person who initiates the Collaboration Session is the Host by default The Host is also automatically the Controller of the Collaboration Session The Host can assign another user to be the Host by selecting Assign Host from the Collaborate menu When initiating a Collaboration Session the Host can specify the Markup to open the host can also open a Markup file while a session is in progress The Host can invite other users to join the Collaboration Session during the session or at initiation of the session The Host can also save the collaboration markup called the Session Markup The host is the only one who can save the Session Markup The Controller Lock The Controller is the person who controls the base file s view during the Collaboration Session Other particip
250. les As Rename the offline files and then save to the server backend system After you make your selection click OK Going Back Online When you have access to the AutoVue server or backend DMS system you can choose to go back online by deselecting Work Offline from the File menu A prompt appears verifying that you want to synchronize your offline files with the files on the online version Click Yes to continue to online mode and to synchronize your files You can continue working in the Client Server deployment or local installation of AutoVue See Synchronizing Files in Offline Mode for more information on synchronizing files 330 Appendix A EDA Terms and Definitions The following table presents commonly used EDA terms and their corresponding defini tions EDA Term Annular ring Definition A circular strip of conductive material that remains after a hole has been drilled through the pad of a printed circuit board Anti copper An area within a fill zone in which copper cannot be placed Aperture An opening similar to the aperture of a camera that is used for photo plotting Apertures are available in various sizes and shapes Aperture list A text file containing the dimensions for each of the apertures used to photo plot PCB artwork Clusters Components that are grouped according to their interrelationships and placed in close proximity on the board This keeps the co
251. line style 274 line thickness 275 M magnify glass 39 magnify window 40 makrups hyperlink 252 264 Markup Entity Properties dialog 273 Markup entity toolbar 21 Markup file 18 create 305 Markup files 200 Markup Filter 199 Markup Indicator 28 197 markup layers 277 Markup Navigation Tree 27 198 Markup Panel 27 198 markup policy 305 markups 197 200 2D 225 markup entities 225 2D non vector measure 229 angle 233 258 arc 233 area 232 calibrate arc 59 101 169 234 241 248 259 calibrate distance 54 97 166 231 238 245 257 cumulative distance 231 distance 230 2D vector measure 235 angle 239 arc 240 258 area 99 238 calibrate arc 59 101 169 234 241 248 259 calibrate distance 54 97 166 231 238 245 257 cumulative distance 237 244 3D 252 text 261 3D markup entitites 252 3D measure angle 239 arc 240 258 create 253 minimum distance 260 vertex coordinates 261 attachment 212 252 264 edit 213 open 212 change arrow style 270 change fill color 271 change fill type 270 change font 272 change line color 268 change line style 269 change line thickness 269 color 271 consolidate Markup files 210 delete 267 EDA measure angle 246 arc 247 area 245 cumulative distance 237 244 distance 243 EDA markup measure entities 241 minimum distance 249 Entity Types 199 filtering 199 flipping all markups 266 formatting markup properties 268 freestyle 227 contiguous 227 non contiguous 227 go to 264
252. ll edges are highlighted on the model A snap box appears when you move the cursor near an edge Click at a point on an edge where you want to place the user coordinate system The x y and z coordinate values for the edge point are displayed The UCS axes move to the new position Midedge If selected all edges are highlighted on the model A snap box appears when you move the cursor near the halfway point of an edge Click at the mid edge point where you want to place the user coordinate system The x y and z coordinate values for the mid edge point are displayed The UCS axes move to the new position Arc Center If selected all arcs and circles are highlighted on the model A snap box appears when you move the cursor near the center of a circle or arc Click on the arc center where you want to place the user coordinate system The x y and z coordinate values for the arc center are displayed The UCS axes move to the new position Face If selected when you move the cursor along a model face the face is highlighted Click at a point on the face where you want to place the user coordinate system The x y and z coordinate values for the arc center are displayed The UCS axes move to the new position Orientation Options When defining a UCS you can define the orientation for the coordinate system The options are Position x y z Coordinates Description If selected enter a value to
253. llowing steps describe how to compare files TASK 1 View the base file 2 From the Analysis menu select Compare STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears 3 Enterthe file name or browse to locate the file you want to compare with the current active file 4 ClickOpen STEP RESULT AutoVue displays the Compare Tree and three windows The first window displays the base file the second displays the compare file and the third displays the comparison results 5 Toview the properties of a modified or moved entity in the base file and in the compare file select the modified or moved amp entity from the tree then right click and select Entity 1 Properties STEP REsULT The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of the entity in the base file 152 WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES 6 Select the entity again then right click and select Entity 2 Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of the entity in the compare file 7 Tocompare the results of the entity in the base file to the compare file select the entity from tree then right click and select Compare Results STEP REsULT The Compare Results dialog appears 8 To view the attribute differences click Attributes 9 Toview the transformation difference click Transformation ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there are no attribute or transformation differences the buttons are disabled 1
254. lose to close the Measurement dialog Area in Vector Files Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Area tab Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points ona drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Snapping modes are displayed 55 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more information Option Descriptions On Select all snapping modes All Off Clear all snapping modes 5 Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing 6 From Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 7 the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas click Add To subtract an area from the Net Area Result click Subtract ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result 10 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP REsULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 11 Right click to complete the
255. lso click Measure 11 STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options Click the Distance tab Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 53 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 4 Toselect all snapping modes click All On To clear all snapping modes click All Off From the Measured Distance Units list select the units of measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to measure the distance along a path select Cumula tive 6 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure 8 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The Measured Distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in the Measurement dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP REsULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the
256. lt AnyMarkupFileCondition name CSI_MarkupType value master gt MarkupFileCondition name CSI MarkupType value consolidated gt MarkupFileCondition name CSI_DocAuthor value CURRENT_USER gt lt AndOperator gt lt NotOperator gt MarkupFileCondition name CSI_DocAuthor value CURRENT_USER gt lt NotOperator gt lt OrOperator gt lt ExConditions gt lt Action gt Action name FilterAttrFromGUI Edit CSI_MarkupType master default false gt lt ExConditions gt AnyMarkupFileCondition name CSI_MarkupType value master gt lt ExConditions gt lt Action gt lt MarkupPolicy gt Updating from Mobile Pack When you are finished working with the Mobile Pack you can update your changes to the backend DMS ERP PLM UCM system You can synchronize all of the markups created in 308 AUTOVUE MOBILE UPDATING FROM MOBILE PACK the Mobile Pack to your backend system These markups will be associated with the file in the backend system from which you originally created the Mobile Pack To initiate the updating process open the Mobile Pack and then do the following TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Update from Mobile Pack ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you are not connected to the backend system you are prompted for your username and password STEP RESULT The Update from Mobile Pack dialog appears It includes the Select Markup File s and Select Properties lists Sync
257. markup entity is selected before opening the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The line color changes for the selected markup entity or entities Line Style Change the line style for a selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 2 Select the markup entity you want to change the line style To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting From the Line Style list select the required line style 274 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line style RESULT The line style changes for the selected markup entity or entities Line Thickness Change the line thickness for a selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity for which you want to change the line thickness To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Line Thickness list select the required line thickness STEP RESULT The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities Defining a Custom Line Thickness To define a custom line thickness take the following steps TASK 1 From the Line Thickness list select Customize 2 Inthe Width Pixels field enter the desired width 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT T
258. measurement STEP REsULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the markup To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 259 Markups 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring Minimum Distance With the Minimum Distance option you can measure the minimum distance between model parts as well as any two points from the selection sets vertices edges mid edges arc axes arc centers faces or any combination of entity types TASK 1 From the Markup menu
259. mpare entities from the same file select the entities for Set 1 and Set 2 from either the base file or the compare file STEP RESULT The selected entities appear in the Set 2 list Click OK STEP RESULT The Compare Tree and the three windows are updated with the set compar ison results To restore the comparison files from the Analysis menu select Compare Files RESULT 154 WORKING WITH 3D FILES GENERATING A BILL OF MATERIAL The files appear in the three windows Generating a Bill of Material For 3D files you can obtain a list with a count of the parts required for manufacturing the item featured in the file To generate a Bill of Material BOM TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Generate Bill of Material STEP REsULT The Bill of Material dialog appears Bill of Material Count Part Name Solid Solid Solid 1 Solid Solid Solid 0 0 5014 0 Solid 2 Tosort the list numerically click the Count column header To sort the list alphabetically click the Part Name column header 4 Toview a part or parts on the model select the parts from the Part Name column ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT The parts are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree 5 Tosavethe Bill of Material click Export STEP REsULT The Export BOM dialog appears 155 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTIT
260. n Observer when the Host invites the user to the Collaboration session A user can also decide to take part as an Observer in the Collaboration Session by selecting Observer in the Join Session dialog There can be more than one Observer during a Collaboration Session Opening a File The Controller is the only user who can open a file during a Collaboration Session To open a URL from the File menu select Open URL To open a local file from the File menu select Open Local File The File Open dialog appears letting you specify the file to open When AutoVue is integrated with a Document Management System DMS clicking Open URL opens a dialog that lets you view a DMS file You can work on this file opened through Open URL during the Collaboration Session When the Host is the same as the Controller and the Host opens a URL the host is prompted to save the Session Markup When the Controller opens a URL the Host is prompted to save the Session Markup Pointer The Pointer 8 is the cross hair marker the Controller uses to point to a specific place in the file 313 REAL TIME COLLABORATION SESSION INFORMATION Session Information The Session Information option is available from the Collaborate menu during a Collab oration Session It displays the Session Subject the name assigned to the Collaboration Session the Session ID the name of the base file viewed the Host and the list of users participating Session Markup
261. n aia Dun M dE e dM nca DE Let 185 Era rte nr Meri er e 185 Dynamic Load Mesh 186 1515 186 PMI 186 n Pape A 186 Colon E E AS E O EE E n reet ee od 187 Configuring Backgrounds sacer n asso NI i apnea tus Dr in ond on P us 188 MiscellaliGOlls 189 Configuring AutoVue for EDA Files ccsessesssssssssescssssscssssssssussncsssssecsuscssssuscaccassescesssasssuceaceascesesaseaseees 190 Customizing Selections eria cem efe eiae fama irre isi UR Erud Paige td 190 Displaying iu o mM Rr n MR P CF 191 3D VIeW sc cinta Sau tas ts E EL Lc cones 192 Synchronizing Layers when Comparing Files 192 Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing esee ten tte tnnnnnns 193 Modifying ueteri tre ere ere ee ate qua recipes leiten era us eene ea 193 CODI A EE 193 ORE c n9 194 Configuring Background Colors for Graphic
262. n arc on the drawing 52 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Angle Snap to two non parallel lines Measurement Snapping Location Distance in non Vector Files Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure i STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options Click the Distance tab In the Measure Distance Units list select a unit of measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to measure the distance along a path select the Cumulative check box Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in their respective fields in Distance tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Distance in Vector Files Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can a
263. n close a Collaboration Session TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Close Collaboration Session STEP RESULT The Save Markup dialog appears prompting you to save the Session Markup 2 Click Yes RESULT All users are notified that the Collaboration Session is closed Requesting Control of a Session TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Request Control ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Collaboration status bar you can also click Request Control 72 STEP RESULT The Controller receives a message that you have requested control 2 Controller clicks OK RESULT You become the Controller of the Collaboration Session NOTE If the Controller does not respond within 10 seconds control is automatically granted to the user who requested it Tracking Changes The Show Presenter Window option allows you to simultaneously track the Controller s base file view changes and everyone s markup changes while your markup file remains unchanged You must be in an unlocked view state before selecting Show Presenter Window From the Collaborate menu select Show Presenter Window You can now track changes without affecting your view 321 REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION Unlocking a View If you do not want to see the Controller s view changes clear the Lock View TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu click Lock View to Presenter ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Collaborate status
264. n the workspace and then select from the menu Rotate Spin Click and drag to rotate the model on all three axes then release the mouse button From the Autovue toolbar you can also click or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Click and drag the object in the direction you want the object to spin continuously then release mouse button To stop the object from spinning click once anywhere in the workspace The spin velocity is determined by the speed at which you drag the mouse From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Re Center All Reposition the entire model back to the center of the AutoVue workspace See Re Centering Selected Only available when one or more model parts are selected The selected part or parts are considered as the central reference point by which the model is repositioned See Re Centering Entity Select a model part or entity as a central reference point to reposition a model See Re Centering Default View Displays view of the model when it is initially loaded You can also right click in the workspace and then select from the menu See 3D Views Camera Views Displays different views of 3D models Isometric Top Bottom Front Back Left Right and View Points You can also right click in the workspace and then select from the menu See 3D Views Views Access native views of the mod
265. nal Gradient or Radial Gradient The background is previewed to the right of the options For the Background Images option TASK 1 Click Add STEP RESULT The Background Image dialog appears 2 Click on the ellipses to the right of the Image File field to browse to the image file ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can only select bmp jpeg or img files 188 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES 3 From the Stretch Type list select whether to leave the image as is Stretch to fill Zoom to fit or Zoom to fill 4 From the Position in the Background list select where to position the image Click OK when done RESULT NOTE The selected Background is implemented when you click OK in the Configuration dialog Miscellaneous From the Configuration tree expand 3D and then select Miscellaneous to display the Miscellaneous option Display The Show Global Axes option is active by default Disable this option to remove the axes that display in the bottom right corner of the workspace Model Tree Enter a different value in the Tree Level field to define the level at which you want the Model Tree to collapse when opening a 3D file The default is 3 levels Manipulator Enable the Align with current UCS option to automatically align the manipulators with the current User defined Coordinate System Selection The following Selection options let you define how AutoVue indicates that an object
266. nal reference files XRefs that are located outside the file Manipulating 2D Vector Files The Manipulate menu option allows you to manipulate how the current active file is displayed For example you can select which layers blocks and external reference files XRefs to display The Manipulate menu options are 41 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Menu Visibility Control Layers Sub Menu Description Select and display different layers of a drawing From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click es See Displaying Layers for more information Blocks Select and display a block from a drawing From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click See Selecting Blocks for more information XRefs Select the XRefs to display in the drawing See Displaying XRefs for more information Overlays Select an overlay to modify See Adding an Overlay for more information Displaying Layers Use this option to configure the layers to display of the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 55 STEP RESULT The Select the Layers to Display dialog appears listing the layers and layer visi bility for the current active file 2 the list of layers in the dialog click Name to sort alpha
267. nap box appears when moving the cursor near the component s end point Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear component Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an elliptical component Pin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a pin Via origin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a via Symbol origin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches the entire component Dx Free snap Allows snapping at any point on the drawing IZ Nets Snap to nets 96 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Distance tab Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See EDA Snapping Modes From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to measure the distance
268. ne the starting point Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The measured line path cumulated measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The cumulated measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in the Measurement Entities dialog Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 2 Measure distance between two points measure cumulative distance From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 231 Markups 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 6 Click OK STEP REsULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring Area Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 Fromthe Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Area ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Mark
269. ned in a specific area of a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Drawing Information and then select Entity Information Click and drag to highlight the entities for which you want to view entity informa tion ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there are no entities within the selected area message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you to select again To exit right click the mouse anywhere in the workspace STEP RESULT The List Entities dialog appears displaying the information of all the selected entities Click OK to close the List Entities dialog Measuring in 2D Files AutoVue provides the ability to perform measurements in 2D files Measurement options vary between vector and non vector files For vector files AutoVue provides the option to snap to fixed points on the drawing For non vector files the Snapping Modes option is disabled However you can free snap to any point on the drawing AutoVue provides several measure options that you can choose from You can access the measure options from Analysis menu and selecting Measure or from the AutoVue toolbar click Measure ul The measure options are as follows Distance Measure the distance between two points Name Description See Distance in non Vector Files Distance in Vector Files 51 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Area Name Description Measure se
270. nformation Free Snap TASK 1 To draw and force a line segment press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag for that line segment 2 To force an existing line segment click and hold the left mouse button on the line segment then press and hold the Shift key 3 When you see that the line segment is horizontal or vertical release the left mouse button then release the Shift key Adding a Leader TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Leader ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Leader caj 2 Clicka point on the document where define the Leader anchor point 3 Move the cursor to draw the Leader ADDITIONAL INFORMATION draw Leader segment and force it to be aligned to the closest axis vertical or horizontal hold the Shift key while moving the cursor 4 Todraw aLeader with multiple line segments repeat steps 2 and 3 as often as you like You can click then drag as often as you like Right click to end the Leader A text box appears at the end of the Leader 6 Inthe text box enter the text you want to attach to the Leader STEP RESULT The height of the text box will resize to fit the entered text 7 Tochange text box font properties from the Markup menu select Format and then select Font ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective font property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the font type style
271. ng Bill of Material ere is Y pee M ag vU avt epe 85 RROTU TRADERE IRATUS vam a no 86 Design RULE ss ier mata LU io EUROPEE 87 Verifyi g a 90 Exporting the Design Verification Results c esssssssseecsscseesssssessnsssecsssstesussscssncencssscescssseseesnsenses 91 Searching Using Entity clu 92 Performing an Entity Type based 93 Performing an Attribute based 94 Maadsunrnd im EDAFIes ee i a arr rd ERE ntu rau as pud rr M de 95 EDA 5 Modes p pog pA oid a bius 95 Measuring DistannCe T iaa 97 amp alibratihiu Distance x B EUER cba ra epa den eto Muir eid 97 Measuring Minimurfi DISCaFICO 98 Measuring ATea uis do ac mr si 99 Measuring an Angle 100 Measuring an ATC uo erba 101 Calibrating aN Ar C iac pi sosta su ee ase E E 101 Working With totins dia paure 103 Models Model nete ete des es ete t UNUS 103 MATS V ISHI ES o PESE NONO O 104 Bookmarks
272. ng method the dynamic load mesh resolution and the visibility of model parts From the Category tree expand 3D and then select Model to load the Loading Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution Initial Visibility and PMI Initial Visibility options Control the streaming method with the Dynamic Loader option When the option is selected Auto Vue loads enough detail to display an accurate visual representation of the model The data is loaded based on the level of detail that is necessary at that point in time 185 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES When the option is deselected AutoVue requests data in 10 chunks until it reaches full resolution for the file You would see the model initially at coarse resolution but continu ously refining Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution Control the initial resolution with the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution slider When you select Dynamic Loader you can control the initial resolution by setting the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution When you set the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution to High the file displays at a higher resolution when you zoom resulting in a smoother look For more information refer to the Installation and Administration Manual Initial Visibility With the Initial Visibility options you can specify the visibility of model parts when first opening a 3D file Option Description Default Visibility Load model with default visibility options All Visible Force
273. ngs Views oo FBDefault view a bene Views Isometric NE Right B Views i If Default i B Isometric User Defined Views Models views Bookmarks 104 WORKING WITH 3D FILES BOOKMARKS TAB Bookmarks Tab The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views Draft views 2D plans 3D Views of an EDA design or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as PDF Bookmarks Design 3D Model Components Nets Bookmarks Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model Space the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark click it to expand and view the lower book mark levels If a minus sign appears to the left ofthe bookmark click it to collapse the lower bookmark levels To go to a destination specified by a bookmark click the bookmark text or the page icon located to the left of the bookmark text Global Axes By default there is a three axis representation in the lower left corner of the workspace The X axis is red the Y axis is green and the Z axis is blue When transforming a model or defining a viewpoint all operations are applied with respect to these axes 105 WORKING WITH 3D FILES SELECTING MODEL PARTS Selecting Model Parts You can select model
274. nipulate the display of a 3D model You can rotate scale or translate a model or any selection of model parts You can also navigate from one page to another page of a multi page file You can access these options from the View menu The options are Menu Zoom Sub Menu Description Zoom In Zoom in by a factor of 2 From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Zoom Out Zoom out by a factor of 2 From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Q Previous Return to the previous zoom level From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Q or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Selected Resize the object so that the objects selected fill the window Dynamic Zoom Click and drag the cursor up to zoom in or down to zoom out From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Zoom Box Click and drag to draw a box around an object that you want to enlarge to fill the window From the Autovue toolbar you can also click 4 or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Zoom Fit Resize object to fit window From the Autovue toolbar you can also click or right click in workspace and then select from the menu 112 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING DISPLAY OF A 3D MODEL Menu Pan Sub Menu Description Click and drag to reposition the model then release the mouse button From the Autovue toolbar you can also click T or right click i
275. nnections on the PCB short so that the board is easier to work with Component An element or a part of a PCB Component density The quantity of components on a unit area of a PCB Component hole A hole in the printed circuit board that corresponds to a pin or wire of a component This hole serves the dual function of attaching the component to the board and establishing the electrical connection between the pin or wire and the remainder of the board circuitry Component library A computer data file that contains the footprint patterns for a number of components 331 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Component side Definition The uppermost or top layer of a board on which most components are placed Component silkscreen The silkscreen markings of the printed circuit board that appear on the component side The silkscreen is applied over the solder mask Component solder mask The colored usually translucent coating applied to the board over the etched copper It protects the selected areas from the soldering process Connection An unrouted partially routed or completely routed path between two pads In a net with n pads there are exactly n 1 connections Copper pour A method by which a copper zone is filled with a specified pattern with objects that cross the zone or lie within the zone being avoided Copper zone An area on a board d
276. nt page and total number of pages current active file size file creation date and cursor s coordinate position The following image shows the status bar 9 acadi2 dwg AutoCAD Version 12 65 2 2 pe449bytes Duni4 2004 1 31 27 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES There are three markers that may be present on the status bar the Markup Indicator icon indicates associated markups the Missing Resource icon 2 indicate missing resources and the Substituted Resource icon indicates substituted resources The Markup Indicator indicates that the current active file has associated markups While in View mode click the Markup Indicator icon to view the Markup Files dialog then select a Markup file or group of Markup files to open The Missing Resource icon X indicates that some main resources required to properly display the current active file are not available To identify the missing resources click the Resource icon to display the Properties dialog The Substituted Resource icon indicates that if a required resource is missing AutoVue has replaced it with another resource To identity the substituted resources click the Substi tuted Resource icon to display the Properties dialog Quick Menus One of the quickest ways to access options is through Quick Menus or context sensitive shortcut menus These are the menus you see when you right click in the workspace Markup Navigation Tree and Model Tree The avai
277. nt to view the X Y and Z coordinates of the reoriented model or selection 6 Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog File Properties The File Properties tab provides file related properties of the selected entity such as author date of creation keywords title and so on To view the file properties select a part or the whole model and then select Analysis and then Show Entity Properties From the Entity Properties dialog appears click the File Properties tab PMI Entities A 3D file s Product and Manufacturing Information PMI is composed of annotations that are included in design files These annotations indicate the limits and constraints that must be observed during the production of the object displayed in the 3D model At the highest level PMI provides information about dimensions feature control frames weld specifications and surface finishes This information is based upon key design features which are specified through datum targets measurement points reference geom etry for example construction lines surfaces and objects or the geometry inherent in the object The following terms can be used interchangeably with the term PMI Datums Cosmetics Dimensioning Cosmetics E Geometric Tolerances GTOLs Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerance GD amp T Functional Tolerance Annotation FTA FTA amp A 127 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PMI ENTITIES PMI Filtering
278. number Click OK to save your markup information and to close the dialog 201 Markups WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Saving a New Markup File To save a new Markup file TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Save ADDITIONALINFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Save Markup td STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears displaying the Markup Information that you entered when creating the markup Save Markup File As Markup ID o Markup Information Cancel User Export L Department Company Location Telephone 2 Inthe Markup ID field enter an ID consisting of any combination of characters numbers 3 Click OK RESULT The Markup file is saved The markups and the Markup file remain displayed in the workspace and in the Markup Navigation tree Opening Markup Files To open a Markup file TASK 1 View a file that has existing markups 202 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES From the Markup menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open Markup s or from the bottom left corner of the status bar you can click Markup Indicator ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If the Markup Indicator icon does not display then the file you opened has no existing markups associated to it STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears From the Markup list select the check box next to Markup f
279. o disable this behaviour clear the Match Extents checkbox in the Overlays section of the 2D Configure dialog Configuring Colors The Colors settings let you modify colors for 2D files From the tree expand 2D and then select Colors to display the following options Option Description Background Change the color of the background for 2D files Measurement Modify the color you want displayed when taking measurements on 2D files 183 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files There are configuration options that you can set to customize the work environment when working with 3D files TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears 2 From the Category tree select 3D STEP RESULT The Rendering Dynamic Rendering and Frame Rate options appear Rendering The Rendering options let you modify the manner in which the model is rendered Changing these options affects the level of detailed displayed The Rendering options are Option Smooth Shading Description Set by default Turning this option off renders curved surfaces of shaded models as a series of flat surfaces The level of detail is thus reduced but render speed is increased Only affects shaded models Back Face Removal If selected instructs AutoVue not to render the back faces of the model being displayed This increases
280. oVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values file 13 Click Close to close the Interference Checking dialog Interference Check Results Options With AutoVue you can configure the results of an Interference Check The configuration options are 150 WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES Actions Option Select Zoom To Description Once the interference check is computed and a result set is selected from the list of results AutoVue zooms to the result Show Intersection Once the interference check is computed and a result set is selected from the list of results AutoVue shows where the intersection of model parts occur Selected Pair Opaque The selected pair from the list of results appear opaque Transparent The selected pair from the list of results appear transparent Hide The selected pair from the list of results appear hidden The Rest Transparent The rest of the model appears transparent while the selected pair is displayed Hide The rest of the model is hidden while the selected pair is displayed Actions Provides a close up look at how model parts interfere Selected Pair Configure if the selected pair from the Results list should display opaque transparent or hidden The Rest Configure if the other parts of the model should display transparent or hidden while the selected pair is displayed Comparing 3D Files
281. ock View to Presenter 322 open a markup 317 pass control 320 remove users 319 request control 321 save session markup 320 ses sion information 323 show presenter window 321 track changes 321 Unlock View to Presenter 322 Session ID 314 Session Information 314 Session Markup file 314 Session Object 314 Show Preseneter Window 314 Unlock View to Presenter 312 real time collaboration Open Local File 313 real time collaboration Open URL 313 remove offline files 329 rename markup layer 208 render modes 114 resolve local resources 180 Resource icon 28 5 save markups 203 selecting entities 65 selecting views 46 Session Markup file 314 Show Net Connectivity 70 snap settings 183 snapping modes 2D 52 235 3D 163 254 EDA 96 242 specifying a view point 46 streaming file 31 Substituted Resource icon 28 44 substituted resources 44 T text box visibility 278 toggle between layers 208 toolbars 21 tooltips 191 U user defined coordinate system 144 activate 147 define 148 delete 146 modify 146 orientation options 145 position options 145 V version information 19 exporting 19 View tab 26 104 WwW walkthrough 172 watermarks 286 work offline 327 328 329 reconnect to server backend 330 workspace 66 paths 180 Feedback If you have any questions or require support for AutoVue please contact your system administrator Some customization and maintenance must be done on the server and cannot be
282. of a 3D Model eere 122 Viewing a Model from a Particular View Point essere eene tentes tonnes 122 Configuring Layers oui idola bo ces Eel S EE nena e tA Mtt aur 123 Entity Propertie Sanonta cesi vu b e 123 tonat ban ORE S SN UN nner Nt ua 123 VIEWING soos ono anced t diea ide prd o asd au e o dep ob eie 124 Viewing Mass Properties 124 Configuring Mass Properties ccccescsecsessscsssssssssessecsscssesssssccssssecsussscsucsaccsscsecesecseesuseacessesscesseseeses 125 NW WING EXteN CS aie bea ceti aco aie A Le desta tud 126 Fil amp PrODGEties 127 5 127 PMIIPIIGFIFIG dir a e a rh POSSE RU DR d UR 128 Aligning toa PMEENTItY ires peine or ca ese eei p Ente ERES ERR 128 GO to a Displayed PMI Entity ulterior concita teeth cocher 128 PMI Configuration Entities ONG 129 tto indoles M iue Lama 130 Manipulating a sDMOdel soc rabie obe Iu adu PURGE MIC MH 130 Panning a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis eee esee ettenttn tette tentent 130 Rotating a Model Along the X Y and 2 46
283. olbar you can also click Note 2 STEP RESULT The Attach To dialog appears 2 Inthe Attach To dialog click the entity type that you want to attach the note to 3 Select the entity on the model that you want to attach a note to STEP REsULT The Note applet appears 4 Typethe text that you want in the applet From the File menu select Information STEP REsULT The Note Information dialog appears 6 To change the default font select Font and the type of font 7 Close the Note applet STEP RESULT The note symbol appears on the entity and in the Markup Navigation Tree 8 Right click outside the note area to complete the modification ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit a note double click on the note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Whenever an entity is attached to a 3D model the anchor point the point at which the entity is attached is highlighted by a small square The square is visible only when the anchor point is visible This feature allows you to precisely identify the location of the anchor point and whether the associated entities are visible or hidden Nesting Markup Entities You can add the Attachment or Hyperlink markup entities as a nested child to any markup entity TASK 1 Add a markup entity to a 3D file for example a Text entity 2 From the workspace or Markup Tree select the Text entity 263 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES 3 From the Markup menu select Attachment or Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMA
284. om the Markup menu select Save ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For a new Markup file you can also click Save Markup STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears 2 Click Export STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears Navigate to the location where you want to export the Markup file 4 Enter filename Click Save RESULT The Markup file is exported to the selected directory The default format saved is Markup Files but you can select another one In the Save as Type list there are six formats to choose from Markup Files DXF Output dfx AutoCAD DWG dwg Microstation DGN Output dgn 204 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Setting the Active Markup File A file can have several Markup files When you open several Markup files simultaneously you can set one as the active Markup file Any changes you make is applied to the current active markup TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open Markup s 27 or from the bottom left corner of the status bar you can click Markup Indicator If the Markup Indicator icon does not display the file you opened has no existing markups asso ciated to it STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears 2 From the Markup list select the markup or markups you want to open 3 From the Active Markup list select the markup you want to make active ADDITIONAL
285. on see the following documents in the Oracle Auto Vue documentation library Installation and Administration Manual Release Notes Supported Formats List Product Limitations Product Variations Feature Matrix Performance Related INI Options DMAPI Manual Conventions The following text conventions are used in this document PREFACE CONVENTIONS Convention Meaning boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements associated with an action or terms defined in text or glossary italic Italic type indicates book titles emphasis or placeholder variables for which you supply particular values monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph URLs code in examples text that appears on the screen or text that you enter 15 PREFACE CONVENTIONS 16 Introduction Oracle s AutoVue suite of enterprise visualization solutions provides native document viewing markup and real time collaboration capabilities that enable Web based document review on hundreds of native document types including 2D 3D CAD EDA Office and graphic formats AutoVue enterprise visualization solutions address the challenge of accessing reviewing and collaborating on documents both internally and with globally dispersed teams and partners in a secure and reliable manner without compromising secu rity or precision Improved team productivity reduced errors and accelerated innov
286. on allows you to view information of a single entity TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Drawing Information and then select Select Single Entity Click the entity for which you want to view information If you did not select an entity a message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you to select again The Get Entity Info dialog appears displaying the information for the selected entity The Extended Data XData button appears if additional information exists for that entity Click XData to view the information Click OK to close the Get Entity Info dialog Viewing Tags Attributes The List Tag Attributes option allows you to view information on block attributes and tags TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Drawing Information and then select List Tags Attributes Click in the area of the file for which you want to view information on block attri butes and tags ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there are no entities within the selected box a message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you to select again STEP RESULT The Block Attributes dialog appears displaying the attributes tags for the selected entity Click OK to close the Block Attributes dialog 50 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Viewing Information for a Set of Entities The Entity Information option allows you to view information of a set of entities contai
287. on the model and in the Model Tree 6 Inthe Minimum Clearance Distance field enter a distance The default value is 0 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Adding a minimum clearance distance not only checks if the two model parts interfere but also checks if they are located within a set minimum distance From the Units list select the unit for the clearance distance 8 configure the interference check results click Options STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears 9 Click Compute in the Interference Checking dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Section plane is not taken into consideration when computing an interface check When the process is complete all the instances of interfering pairs appear in the Results list The number of interfering pairs found appears in the Description box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To view a pair s interference information click the corresponding Results line STEP RESULT The Compute button changes to Stop To stop the Interference Checking process at any point click Stop The information appears in the Description box and AutoVue zooms into the interfering area 10 Tosavethe results click Export STEP RESULT The Export Results dialog appears 11 Specify the file name and the directory where you want to save the file 12 ClickSave to close the Export Result dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To perform another interference check click Reset then click the type of interference check STEP RESULT Aut
288. onnecting segment connecting points the point and the the point and the the point and the line arc plane Line Distance between The line and axis The distance two lines must be parallel between the line and Distance between the plane NOTE The lines must the line and arc axis be parallel NOTE The line must be parallel to the plane Arc Center Distance between Distance between the axes of the arcs the arc axis and the lane NOTE Arc planes P must be parallel NOTE The plane and the arc plane must be perpendicular Plane Distance between the two planes NOTE The planes must be parallel TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Distance tab 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION See 3D Snapping Modes for more information STEP RESULT All entities of the selected snapping modes are highlighted on the model 4 From the Units list select a measurement unit On the model select an entity as the starting point for the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to take more than one measurement from the same starting point select Fix Position 165 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES 6 Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the end point for the measurement
289. ons TASK 1 From the File menu select Import File for Mockup STEP RESULT The Mockup dialog appears 2 Click Add STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to locate the file you want to import 4 Click Open STEP RESULT The file appears in the Mockup dialog To import more than one file repeat steps 2 to 4 5 The Enter Markup Mode check box is selected by default If you deselect it any modifications you make to the mockup are not saved 6 Click OK to the close the Mockup dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Once open you can position these models in the desired manner using the Transformation tool or align the models using Part Alignment or run Interfer ence Checks RESULT The file or files you imported appear in the workspace See Transforming a 3D Model Part Alignment Performing an Interference Check Deleting Models from a Mockup The following steps explain how to delete models from a mockup TASK 1 2 From the File menu select Import File for Mockup STEP RESULT The Mockup dialog appears Select the file or files that you want to remove 111 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING DISPLAY OF A 3D MODEL 3 Click Remove STEP RESULT The file or files are removed from the list 4 Click OK toclose the Mockup dialog RESULT The file or files disappear from the workspace Manipulating Display of a 3D Model AutoVue provides the flexibility to ma
290. oolbar you can also click Area 22 Distance Measure the distance between two points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance d 2D Vector Snapping Modes The available snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical points on a drawing For example if you select Snap to End Point and you move the cursor over an end point of a line the end point will be highlighted by a snap box The snapping modes allow you to snap to the mid center and end points of an entity 235 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Button Snap to Description d End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near a linear component s end point X Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear component Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an elliptical component x Free snap Allow snapping at any point on the drawing NOTE When selecting a snapping mode you also have the option to select all snapping modes All On or to turn off snapping modes All Off The below table lists snapping locations for certain measurements Measurement Snapping Location Area Snaps to a shape on the drawing Arc Snaps to an arc on the drawing Angle Snap to two non parallel lines Measuring Distance
291. oolbar you can also click Distance a Angle 54 Arc amp or Minimum Distance See Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities Note Add a note to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note See Adding a Note Signoff Create an approval stamp containing information about the markup author date and time of creation From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff gt See Adding Signoff Entities Stamp Click and drag a stamp to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Stamp See Adding a Stamp Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities When marking up 3D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode 253 Markups 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized or deleted NOTE If you manipulate a part of a model the measure entity values do not update accord ingly AutoVue provides the option to snap to different entity types on the model In Markup mode you can choose from several measurement options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measure ment to access the following measure options Name Description Angle Measure the precise angle
292. ors pin one markings part numbers the company name and copyright info SMT Surface Mount Technology PCB technology whereby the leads on the chips and components are soldered onto the surface of the board rather than inserted into it The use of SMT results in smaller and faster printed circuit boards Solder mask A negative plot of pads with a guard band around the pads Also a lacquer applied to prevent solder from adhering to unwanted areas on the PCB Solder paste A pattern that serves as a template for solder paste application when the board is manufactured Solder side The PCB surface opposite the one on which most components are mounted component side Also the bottom layer of the board Test point A special point of access to an electrical circuit that is used for electrical testing purposes Through hole via A via that connects the surface layers on a PCB Trace Track The copper trails electrical connection between two or more points on the PCB and the onscreen representation of that copper 335 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Venting patterns Definition Patterns etched in the board that allow gases formed during fabrication to escape Vertex A logical point at which a track is ended and restarted A vertex is located at each change of direction on the track Via feed through hole A hole connecting layers of
293. ose the Measurement dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 Measure an arc in the drawing 2 From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 101 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 102 Working with 3D Files From AutoVue s 3D mode you have many ways in which to manipulate the model For example you can select model parts to transform independently from the rest of the model as well as modify the selected model part s visibility and attributes 3D mode also gives you the ability to perform an entity search and compute mass properties and it allows you to import 3D models into the current window and export files to other formats Additionally the Global Axes inform you of where the X Y and Z axes are positioned throughout all the operations you perform in AutoVue The Perspective option shows objects in three dimension with distances planes and curved surfaces adjusted to give a sense of depth You have lighting options where you can adjust the overall lighting surroun
294. ou must select each file and click Remove Once all the files have been removed click OK to close the Offline Files dialog Reopen the Offline Files dialog and then click Options STEP RESULT The Offline File Options dialog appears 3 The Offline Files Storage field displays the default location where offline files are saved Click Browse to save the offline files to another location 4 Under Base File select to either include the native file or streaming file in the offline files ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If the streaming files are not available for a file a warning appears and gives you the option to include the native file 5 Under Markup select whether to include all associated Markup files in the offline files ADDITIONAL INFORMATION By default all viewable markups are included 6 Under Security select whether you want to password protect the offline files and all associate functions 7 Click OK STEP RESULT The Offline File Options dialog closes Working in Offline Mode The Work Offline option in the Client Server deployment of AutoVue provides you with the ability to view and markup files when you do not have access to the AutoVue server or backend DMS system TASK 1 From the File menu select Work Offline 2 To modify offline files options click Options See Managing Offline Files for more information 3 Toadd offline files click Add STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 4 Bro
295. ove if you want to move the overlay Click a point on the base file where you want to set the lower left corner of the overlay Click another point where you want to set the upper right corner of the overlay ADDITIONAL INFORMATION As you select the point to define the position of the upper right corner you can resize the destination box Click Scale if you want to resize the overlay Enter the XOffset and YOffset coordi nates and or the Scale Factor ADDITIONAL INFORMATION XOffset and YOffset are relative to the base drawing and all options are displayed at their current values Click Warp to adjust the overlay Click a point on the overlay and drag the cursor to where you want the overlay starting point Click another point and drag the cursor to where you want the overlay to end ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The overlay s size is scaled to accommodate the origin and desti nation points you defined Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To modify other overlays repeat steps 2 to 4 STEP RESULT The changes are applied to the selected overlay 45 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Removing an Overlay TASK 1 From the File menu select Import File as Overlay STEP RESULT The Overlays dialog appears 2 Select the overlay that you want to remove 3 Click Remove STEP RESULT The overlay is removed from the list 4 Click OK RESULT The overlay is removed from the display Selecting View
296. ox appears when you hover mouse pointer model over a vertex Edge Line gy Highlights edges on the The edge is highlighted when you hover the mouse model pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the finite edge is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite edge is selected Edge Middle Highlights edges on the The edge is highlighted and a tooltip appears indicating A model the middle edge coordinate when you hover the mouse pointer Highlights arcs on the The arc is highlighted when you hover the mouse model pointer Arc Center Highlights arcs and circles on the model The arc is highlighted and a tooltip appears indicating the arc center coordinate of the arc when you hover the mouse pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the arc center is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite arc axis is selected Face Plane aa Highlights faces when you move the cursor over a face The face is highlighted when you hover the mouse pointer Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two vertices edges arc axes faces or any combination of these entity types NOTE To revert to the Point to Point distance measurement set the SHOW POINTOPOINT INI option Refer to the Installation and Administration Manual for more information The following table details how the distance between two entities are measured
297. p File to Import dialog appears Locate the file that you want to open 317 REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION 6 Click Open In the Markup Files dialog select Session Markup if you want to open a Session Markup and keep the layer colors and markup entities from the Collaboration Session Click OK RESULT The selected Markup appears in the Collaboration window Joining a Session You can either join a collaboration session that you are invited to or to a session for which you have been provided the session ID and password When you are invited to a collabor tation session you get a tooltip notification If you do not want to receive any notifications when you are invited to a Collaboration Sessions select Do Not Disturb from the Collabo rate menu TASK 1 Ur 2 MJ From the Collaborate menu select Join Collaboration Session STEP RESULT The Join Session dialog appears From the Session ID list select the active session you want to join Enter the Password if the Host has set one If you just want to be an Observer select the check box If you want to select a layer color click Layer Color select a color from the list in the Layer Color dialog and click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Layer Color is disabled if the Host did not select Let user choose when initiating the Collaboration Session or when you are invited to join the session STEP RESULT The Layer Color dialog appea
298. p Layer From the Markup Layers dialog you can create a markup layer TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears Markup Layers t T tv Markup M LayerName COLOR acad2006 002 0 Red acad2006 001 0 Red All OFF Untitled4 0 Red Untitleds 0 Red BRIEK Currently Active Layer 0 2 Click New STEP RESULT The New Markup Layer dialog appears 3 Enter a name for the markup layer 206 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS 4 ClickOK STEP RESULT The new markup layer is added to the list in the Markup Layers dialog 5 To change the color of the new layer click Color STEP RESULT The Layer Color dialog appears The default layer color is red 6 Selecta color and click OK 7 Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog Setting the Active Markup Layer A markup can have several layers and you can set a layer as the active markup layer When a markup layer is active all modifications you make are applied to that markup layer There are two ways in which to set a layer as active TASK 1 Fromthe Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 Youcan perform one of the following a From the Markup Layers list select the layer you want to make active and click Set Active b From the Currently Active Layer list select the layer you want to mak
299. p portion of the tab lists all the instances of the currently displayed page of the drawing The lower portion of the tab lists the associated pins for selected instances When you select a component it appears highlighted on the drawing To select more than one component press the Shift or Control key while selecting All the selected components and their associated pins are highlighted Components wu Components RefDes Compon Le C345 0402 2 C344 CAP 0402 1 C343 CAP 0402 1 C342 CAP 0402 1 C360 CAP 0402 1 v jj gt Component Pins Name Net Pin U C341 1 3 3 DC UNSF C341 2 GND UNSF gt Components Nets Bookmarks 63 WORKING WITH EDA FILES NETs TAB Nets Tab NOTE The Nets tab displays only for EDA drawings The Nets tab lists nets and associated net nodes pins connected to a net The top portion of the tab lists all the nets of the drawing s currently displayed page The lower portion of the tab lists the associated net nodes for the selected nets All selected nets are highlighted on the drawing To select more than one net press the Shift or Control key while selecting Alternately in the Nets panel you can click and drag in the Navigation Panel list to select multiple nets The Nodes on Net panel lists the associated nodes for the selected nets Nets Name Parti
300. pear by default The toolbar contains frequently used tools Previous Page j Next Page and Page Number Qa You can also access the navigation buttons from the View menu by selecting Page and then the required navigation button 33 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES 34 Working With 2D Files When working with vector and non vector 2D files in AutoVue you can instantly change how the active file is displayed in the workspace by choosing from a number of different view options For example you can zoom into an area of the drawing magnify a part of the drawing and rotate a file s orientation clockwise counterclockwise or flip a file s orienta tion along the horizontal or vertical axis When viewing 2D vector files you have access to entity information views saved in the drawing and the ability to intelligent snap when performing measurements All the information is obtained by AutoVue by referencing various sources either internal files or external reference files that are located outside the file In addition to the features mentioned this chapter provides detailed information on how you can modify AutoVue to suit your needs and preferences through a broad range of configuration options Searching Text You can perform a text search on 2D vector and text based documents AutoVue provides search options that you can use to customize a search These options are as follows NOTE You cannot perform
301. r which you want to modify the font then do one of the following From Markup menu select Format and then select Font The Font dialog appears From the lists select the font font style and font size You also can 272 MARKUPS FoRMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES select to add a strikeout and underline by selecting their check boxes Click OK to the close the dialog and implement the changes From the Markup Entity toolbar select the font font size and font style bold italic and underline from their respective lists and buttons The font changes are imple mented Changing Measurement Units and Symbols You can change the unit of measure and add a symbol to a measurement and have it appear on the drawing TASK 1 2 Create the markup measure entity that you want Double click the measurement that you want to change the unit of measure or add a symbol to STEP RESULT The appropriate Measure dialog appears Deselect Display Unit check box if you want to hide the unit on the drawing It is selected by default From the Units list select the unit that you want to change the measurement to From the Symbol list select the symbol that you want to add to the measurement Click OK RESULT The unit of measure changes and the selected symbol is added to the measurement and appears in the workspace Using the Markup Entity Properties Dialog You can use the Markup Entity Properties dialog to modif
302. re displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 5 Fromthe Dist Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc distance 6 From the Angles Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 7 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 8 Ifyou selected Arc Entity click the edge of an arc STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted 240 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 10 11 12 Click to complete the measurement STEP REsULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the markup To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measur
303. re grouped under Common Section Highlight and Geometry Highlight as follows Common Option Description Background Set the background color for 3D view Selection Set the color when selecting a model or model parts Entity Default Set the default color to use when the model color is not stored in the native file Measurement Set the color for measurements Min Distance Set 1 Set the color of the first set point when measuring minimum distance Min Distance Set 2 Set the color of the second set point when measuring minimum distance 187 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Section Highlight Option Description Edges Set the color for the section edges when defining Section Cut Options Fill Set the fill color when defining Section Cut Options Geometry Highlight Option Description Vertex Set the color for vertices when highlighted during measurement and markup Face Set the color for faces when highlighted during measurement and markup Edge Set the color for edges when highlighted during measurement and markup Configuring Background With the Background options you can select a gradient or an image to display in the back ground From the Configuration tree expand 3D and then select Background The Back ground Gradient and Background Images options appear For the Background Gradient option Select either Plain Directio
304. rence files associated with the current active file 2 Select the check box beside the XRefs that you want to display Deselect the check box beside the XRefs that you want to hide 4 Click OK to close the Select the External References to Display dialog RESULT The selected XRefs are displayed Displaying Details About Resources Resource information for a file is displayed in the left of the AutoVue status bar If a file is missing resources the Missing Resource icon X appears to the left ofthe AutoVue status bar These missing resources can be XRefs text fonts linestyles or shape files If a missing 43 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES appears NOTE In order to correctly display a file you must make sure all required resources are provided to AutoVue See Viewing Missing XRef Notification Icon for information on missing XRefs TASK 1 Click the Missing Resource icon X or the Substituted Resource icon on the AutoVue status bar ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the File menu you can also select Properties STEP RESULT The Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Resource Information tab to display details about missing or substi tuted resource information required to properly display this file ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A green check mark indicates the resources that AutoVue is able to access A red 20 indicates that resources are not accessible A yellow exclamation mark
305. rence point A snap box appears when moving the mouse over an edge Midedge Highlight all edges in the model Select a mid edge to use as the central reference point Arc Center Highlight all arcs and ellipses in the model Select an arc center to use as the central reference point A snap box appears when moving the mouse over an arc or ellipses indicating the center of the arc Face Select a face to use as the central reference point When moving the cursor along a model face the face is highlighted Re Centering a Model to an Entity To re center a model to an entity perform the following TASK 1 From the View menu select Re Center and then select Entity STEP RESULT The Re Center dialog appears 2 Select the entity that you want to use as the central reference point STEP RESULT All instances of the entity are highlighted 3 Click an instance of the entity STEP RESULT The model is repositioned using the selected entity as the central reference point 4 Close the Re Center dialog Model Tree The Model Tree displays the model s hierarchy inter relation of different parts assemblies bodies and missing XRef notifications With the tree you can select different parts and modify their attributes such as color visibility render mode or transformation 108 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MODEL TREE Expanding Collapsing the Model Tree You can expand the Model Tre
306. rification 86 entitiy properties 70 entity properties 68 entity search 92 93 94 filtering entity types 68 layer sets 77 layers 73 manipulating views 80 measuring 95 angle 100 arc 101 calibrating arc 59 101 169 234 241 248 259 calibrating distance 54 97 166 231 238 245 257 distance 97 minimum distance 98 snapping modes 96 242 net connectivity 70 net instances 71 net properties 71 selecting entities 65 66 entity seach dialog 67 terms and definitions 331 zooming to an entity 67 enable look ahead 179 entity properties 123 attributes 123 124 extents 126 mass properites 125 mass properties 124 entity properties dialog box 68 entity reference 107 entity search dialog 67 export Markup file 204 F file convert 296 file properties 32 open 28 print 290 file properties 32 127 file version information 19 files archive 32 open from server 29 30 31 329 open local 28 open url 29 properties 32 streaming file 31 fill color 271 277 fill type 276 filtering entity types 68 font 272 font paths 181 frame rate 185 From 51 G GUI 20 H header footer 283 import Markup file 203 insert codes 283 L layer sets 77 user defined layers sets create 78 delete 79 save with markups 79 viewing 77 layers 73 123 192 changing color 76 changing order 74 logical layer visibility 75 logical layers 73 sorting 77 physical layer visibility 74 physical layers 73 leader alignment 278 line color 271 274
307. ring XRef Paths XRef Paths are the directory paths for any external reference files associated with 2D 3D or EDA files TASK 1 From the Category tree expand General and then select XRef Paths 2 Click Add SrEP REsULT The Add Path dialog appears 3 Enterthe directory path or scroll to locate the directory where the external refer ence files are located 4 Tobrowse all subdirectories below the current path type two asterisks at the end of the file path For example C samples results in browsing all subdirec tories below samples 5 Tobrowse one subdirectory below the current path type one asterisk at the end of the file path For example C samples results in browsing one subdirectory below samples 180 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS 6 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more than one path to the list repeat steps 3 to 5 STEP RESULT The directory path appears 7 To change the order select the path you want to move then click Up or Down to move the path to where you wantit in the list To remove a path select the path and click Remove Click OK to close the Configuration dialog Configuring Font Paths Font Paths are the directory paths for fonts required by 2D 3D EDA or PDF files TASK 1 From the Category tree expand General and then select Font Paths 2 Click Add STEP RESULT The Add Path dialog appears 3 Enterthe directory path or scroll
308. rking with Markup taedet rear rer menor i nN ter Sin eran ene mr 206 Creating a Markup Je eo pecori taies a pe ped 206 Setting the Active Markup Layer cessscssecssscssscssecseccssecssesusccsssssscssccssesssccsscessesssecseecssessscenserseeses 207 Changing the Color of a Markup 207 Renaming Markup 208 Toggling between Markup 208 DJeletihiga LAV EP ome testem 209 Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer 209 Consolidating Markup Files essere toris titer eren ni ci veo hri res 210 Marking up 2D and 3D FIles 211 Adding an Attachment GIU d a d o epi 212 Opening an Attachment noe ad ee ed tn Le 212 Editing an cose Da e e UNS ade neta ii E aside DAS dU oie Nol 213 213 Creating a Hyperlifikc 213 Openinga Hypetlihk uis rti 215 Editing a Hyperlink uiii irit teta tantu neiii 215 Deletitig
309. rkup entities modified before the selected date After Displays all markup entities modified after the selected date Between Displays all markup entities modified on the selected date Displays all markup entities modified between the selected dates 199 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Last Modified column header To display markups by page location click the Page tab and select one of the following Option Description All pages Displays markup entities on all the pages pag play P pag Current page Displays markup entities on the currently selected page Page ranges Displays the markup entities on the selected page g 8 play P pag range To display markups by layers click the Layer tab and select the check box next to the layer or layers To remove a layer from the filter deselect the associated check box In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Layer column header NOTE To remove the filters from the Markup menu select Filter and then select Show All Working with Markup Files Markups can be saved as separate Markup files while working with the same document You have the option to add user information to the Markup file save and create separate Markup files with different markup IDs import and export Markup files or change the active Markup file Saved States When you
310. rs Click OK in the Join Session dialog RESULT You have joined the session Inviting Users During a Session TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Invite STEP RESULT The Invite dialog appears 318 REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION From the Online list select the user or users that you want to invite Click Add ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can add users that are going to join the session at a later time by clicking Add New and entering the Username STEP RESULT The user or users you selected appears in the Invited list Click OK RESULT The users receive a tooltip notification that he or she has been invited to join the session Removing Users from a Session When initating a Collaboration Session if you added a user by mistake and would like to remove a user that has been added to the Invited list you can do so You cannot remove Invited users once the Collaboration Session is in progress TASK 1 In the Invite dialog locate the Invited list STEP RESULT The Invite dialog appears From the Invited list select the user or users that you want to remove Click Remove STEP RESULT The user or users you selected appear in the Online list Click OK RESULT The users receive a tooltip notification that he or she is no longer invited to the session Assigning a Host During a Session TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Assign Host STEP RESULT T
311. rtial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears 9 Click OK to print STEP RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing 288 PRINTING PARTIAL PREVIEW OF A FILE Creating a New Pen Setting TASK 1 2 3 Set the thickness for the color indices that you want Click Save As The Save As dialog appears Enter a file name with a c2t extension then click OK STEP REsULT The new pen setting appears in the Current Pen Settings list In the Print Properties dialog click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Deleting a Pen Setting TASK 1 2 Select the pen setting that you want to delete from the Current Pen Settings Click Delete 5 RESULT The pen setting disappears from the list Click Cancel to close the Print Properties dialog Partial Preview of a File The Partial Print Preview dialog displays the printable area on top of the page area so that users can have a clear idea of what will be printed NOTE Option is only enabled when Current is selected from Document Pages TASK 1 2 Configure the print properties Click Partial Preview in the Print Properties dialog STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears and highlights the area that will be printed The Paper size Printable Area and Drawing Area are displayed Click OK to close the Partial Print Preview dialog
312. rver ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Files located in the server are displayed in the dialog 3 Selecta file and click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace Opening a File from a Backend DMS System When AutoVue is connected to a backend Document Management System DMS system you can open a file located in the system from the File Open dialog Depending on the backend DMS system you are connected to you must enter your username and pass word when opening files stored in the backend system Refer to Oracle VueLink documentation for more information TASK 1 From the File menu select Open STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 To open a file from the backend DMS system from the left panel click DMS il ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If AutoVue is configured with one DMS system the name of the DMS would appear instead of DMS If AutoVue is connected to multiple backend DMS systems a list of the DMS system names appear when you click DMS Select the DMS from which you want to open files SrEP REsULT An authentication dialog appears 3 Enterthe login information and then click OK SrEP REsULT The backend DMS system files appear in the File Open dialog 4 Selecta file and then click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace Searching for Files in a Backend DMS System When AutoVue is connected to backend DMS system you can search for files in the system by entering specific se
313. s 3D Model Components Nets Bookmarks 23 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model Space the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark click it to expand and view the lower book mark levels Ifa minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark click it to collapse the lower bookmark levels To go to a destination specified by a bookmark click the bookmark text or the page icon located to the left of the bookmark text Components Tab NOTE The Components tab displays only for EDA drawings The Components tab lists component instances and the associated pins The top portion of the tab lists all the instances of the currently displayed page of the drawing The lower portion of the tab lists the associated pins for selected instances When you select a component it appears highlighted on the drawing To select more than one component press the Shift or Control key while selecting All the selected components and their associated pins are highlighted Components wi Components RefDes Compon Loa C345 0402 2 C344 CAP 0402 1 C343 CAP 0402 1 C342 CAP 0402 1 C360 0402 1 C341 CAP 0402 si gt Component Pins Name Net Pin U C341 1
314. s AutoVue generates a streaming file when a native file is opened for the first time The streaming file contains display information for the native file and is quickly accessed by AutoVue When AutoVue accesses the file again it loads the display from the streaming file instead of the native file As a result the loading time of the display decreases If the native file changes or its external resource files change or if an INI option changes the streaming file is invalidated In this case AutoVue opens the display from the native file and generates a new streaming file 31 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES Archive Files The full archive file directory displays in the AutoVue window It is not necessary to decom press the file Double click a file to display it within AutoVue If you would like to markup an archived file the file must be made accessible to AutoVue in a decompressed form File Properties You can access the file properties from the File menu The Properties dialog provides infor mation specific to the current active file such as filename file size date of creation and file type The file properties that you can view are Property Description File Information specific to the current active file such as filename file size date of creation file type and x y amp z dimensions Resource Information Resources specific to the current active file such as text font shape file line style and external
315. s The Views option allows you to access different named views of a file TASK 1 From the View menu select Views STEP RESULT The Select a Named View dialog appears 2 From the list select the view that you want to display 3 Click OK RESULT The selected view is displayed NOTE To return to the default view select Default View Specifying a View Point The View Point option allows you to render a drawing from a selected viewpoint TASK 1 From the View menu select View Points STEP RESULT The View Point dialog appears 46 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES 2 Enter the X Y and Z coordinates for the view point with which you want to render the drawing 3 Click OK RESULT The drawing is displayed from the selected view point Analyzing 2D Vector Files With the analysis functionality you can measure entities compare two files or view drawing information These options are available under the Analysis menu The following table lists all the options from the Analysis menu Menu Measure Sub Menu Description Measure the distance area angle and arc of an entity From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click pm See Also Measuring in 2D Files for more information Compare Compare two files See Comparing 2D Files for more information Show Drawing Information Select Single Entity Displays information for the selected entity S
316. s a PCB the schematic view displays in one window and the 2D PCB view displays in the other window In this case take the following steps to see the 2D and 3D views of the PCB a In the window s dialog deselect the Automatic option b Select a different view from the TYPE list For example you can switch between Schematic and PCB 3D View 7 Select an entity in the 3D view RESULT The same entity is highlighted in the 2D view of this file NOTE You can select entities in the 2D view or 3D view of the file The selected entities are highlighted in both open views of this file Showing the Net Connectivity when Cross Probing To display the net connectivity of the design when cross probing perform the following steps TASK 1 Select an entity or entities in any open file 2 Right click and select Show Net Connectivity RESULT The net connectivity for the entity or entities that you selected are highlighted in all the files Zooming when Cross Probing When you are cross probing files you can zoom in on the entities you select Zoom in on a selected entity or entities When cross probing between a schematic drawing and PCB design 83 WORKING WITH EDA FILES COMPARING A PCB WITH ARTWORK TASK When cross probing between the 2D and 3D views of the same file Select an entity or entities in either one of the open files or views ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you are cross probing between
317. s in the Views tab under the User Defined Views tree 5 Click OK to close the Explode dialog RESULT The exploded state is saved See Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model User Defined Coordinate Systems You have the option of creating customized three axis coordinate systems As with the Global Axes and the World Coordinate System the user defined axes are represented by a red X axis a green Y axis and a yellow Z axis See Global Axes When you set a User Defined Coordinate System UCS as the active axes operations such as measuring transforming a model or defining a view point are applied with respect to these axes You can create multiple UCS s for a 3D file For multiple page 3D files you can even set active a different UCS for each page Position Options When defining a UCS you can define the point where you want to place the user coordinate system 144 WORKING WITH 3D FILES USER DEFINED COORDINATE SYSTEMS The options are Position x y z Coordinates Description If selected enter a value to specify where the three axes are positioned Vertex If selected all vertices are highlighted on the model A snap box appears when you move the cursor on a vertex Click the vertex point where you want to place the user coordinate system The x y and z coordinate values for the vertex are displayed The UCS axes move to the new position Edge If selected a
318. s of the nets Manufacturing Targets the physical properties of a particular entity Design Rule Checks For design rule checks that have values you can set the global unit of measurement The available design rule checks are Type Clearance Design Rule Check Minimum Clearance Pad gt Pad Description Specify the minimum distance between the pad outline and the outline of its drill hole on all physical layers NOTE The two outlines geometries are part of the pin pad entity but on different logical layers Minimum Clearance Pad gt Trace Specify the minimum pad to trace clearance and pads on the same physical layer NOTE Only the pad outline is considered Does not take into account traces connected to a pin pad on the same net 87 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type Design Rule Check Minimum Clearance Trace gt Trace Description Specify the minimum trace to trace clearance on the same physical layer NOTE Does not take into account directly connected traces Minimum Clearance Component gt Component Specify the minimum component to component clearance on the same physical layer component top side or component bottom side NOTE Only the logical layer that defines the actual outline of the component is considered A component entity is usually made up of geometries on dif
319. section or press the Shift or Control key to select multiple logical layers NOTE One physical layer can be selected at a time The Logical Layers section displays a list of logical layers and the layer attribute options you can modify visibility order and color To modify the attributes for both physical and logical layers first select the layers you want to modify and then use the settings to make the changes you want When you select physical layers and modify settings from the Layers dialog a message displays at the bottom of the dialog to indicate your last action When you are satisfied with the changes click Apply to make the changes in the workspace You can also create layer sets to save your modified layer settings to reuse them later When you open a file it displays all layer sets for that file You can choose the layer set you need or create your own 73 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS Changing the Order of Layers You can change the order in which layers display in the workspace Specifically you can change the z order of layers TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers 5 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 55 STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Ifthe Logical Layers section is not open click Expand 3 Select the layer or layers that you want to move To do so you can do one of the following
320. semblies and bodies The tree also indicates if a required external reference XRef is missing With the tree you can select different parts and modify their attributes such as color visibility render mode or transformation See Displaying XRefs for more information on XRefs 25 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE NOTE The Models tab displays only for 3D drawings Models el v Page 1 0 amp v SolidEdge ilearn se 84 v 3DSolidEdge top amp IN 84 v 3DsolidEdge stor T v 3DselidEdge amp M v 3DSolidEdge arc amp M v 3DSolidEdge scre 0 0 0 Models Vi Views Tab The Views tab lists the defaults standard native and user defined views You can switch to a standard native or user defined view as well as add or delete user defined views NOTE The Views tab displays only for 3D drawings Views FH view f Camera views D rS Isometric MB Top H Front MB Back B Left Right if Native Views 0 MB Default IB Isometric oo gaff User Defined Views Models views Bookmarks 26 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Markup Navigation Tree When you are in Markup mode a Markup Navigation Tree appears below the workspace If the tree does not appear from the Options menu select Show Panel and then sele
321. sers require access to their files when they are not connected to their backend systems For example having offline access to files is essential when you need to add markups to a document during your regular commute or when bringing all your files when on a business trip When you select the Work Offline option from the Client Server deployment of AutoVue a predefined list of files and associated resources and markups are copied to your local system as offline files and a local installation of AutoVue is deployed Once installation is complete you can continue working on your files with AutoVue in offline mode NOTE When going offline for the first time the Auto Vue installer is automatically launched The installation may take a few minutes depending on your internet connection and the speed of your local machine Managing Offline Files This section explains how to configure options for the offline files from AutoVue TASK 1 From the File menu of the Client Server deployment of AutoVue select Work Offline ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you are working in offline mode select Manage Offline Files from the File menu SrEP REsULT The Offline Files dialog appears 327 AUTOVUE IN OFFLINE MODE WORKING IN OFFLINE MODE 2 modify the offline files options click Options ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there are already files listed in the Offline Files dialog you cannot change the offline options To change the options y
322. sistive technology This documenta tion is available in HTML format and contains markup to facilitate access by the disabled community Accessibility standards will continue to evolve over time and Oracle is actively engaged with other market leading technology vendors to address technical obstacles so that our documentation can be accessible to all of our customers For more information visit the Oracle Accessibility Program Web site at http www oracle com accessibility Accessibility of Code Examples in Documentation Screen readers may not always correctly read the code examples in this document The conventions for writing code require that closing braces should appear on an otherwise empty line however some screen readers may not always read a line of text that consists solely of a bracket or brace 13 PREFACE RELATED DOCUMENTS Accessibility of Links to External Web Sites in Documentation This documentation may contain links to Web sites of other companies or organizations that Oracle does not own or control Oracle neither evaluates nor makes any representa tions regarding the accessibility of these Web sites TTY Access to Oracle Support Services Oracle provides dedicated Text Telephone TTY access to Oracle Support Services within the United States of America 24 hours a day 7 days a week For TTY support call 800 446 2398 Outside the United States call 1 407 458 2479 Related Documents For more informati
323. sure its arc length start and end of angel sweep radius center and diameter TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Arc tab 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snap ping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring select all snapping modes click On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See EDA Snapping Modes Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc 6 From the Arc Information section select the unit in which you want to measure the distance of the arc 7 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 8 Ifyou selected From Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordi nates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog 9 Ifyou selected Arc Entity click the edge of the arc that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEPRESULT Thearcis highlighted The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog 10 Click Close to cl
324. sured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle The options are degrees or radians 4 Select Add Radius if you want to measure the radius of the arc Select Add Diameter if you want to measure the diameter of the arc 6 Click three points on the drawing to define the arc you want to measure STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 7 Clickagain to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path arc measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer and in the Measurement Entities dialog To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles You can click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 Measure an arc in the drawing 2 From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 Fromthe Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want calibrate the distance 4 Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 234 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP ME
325. surface that you want to measure STEP RESULT The face surface is highlighted The measured surface appears in the Measure ment dialog 7 Ifyou selected Entity Surface click the entity that you want to measure STEP RESULT The entity as well as all the faces belonging to the body are highlighted The measured surface of the body appears in the Measurement dialog 8 measure the face surface of the entity click on the highlighted body STEP RESULT A list appears displaying the entity and its parents 9 Select the entity or a parent from the list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To measure the face surface of a parent selectthe parent from the list STEP RESULT The selected entity is highlighted and the measured surface appears in the Measurement dialog 10 Totake another measurement click Reset 11 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 171 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH Walkthrough The Walkthrough feature in AutoVue provides an interactive visualization of 3D models File Edit View Manipulate Analysis Markup Collaborate Options Help Off 6 22 ORB A 09 a Bookmarks sl Model 5 Layout Walkthrough Instructions Walk forward backward Left click and drag mouse up down or up down arrow key Turn left right Left click and drag mouse left right or left right arrow key More navigation options Press Ctrl Alt or Shift Move through walls
326. t If you are displaying the 3D view of an EDA design AutoVue displays the general attributes mentioned above In addition AutoVue displays attributes specific to the Printed Circuit Board PCB such as component name board side component class and device type Ifa 3D file has Product and Manufacturing Information PMI anda PMI entity is selected the PMI attributes are displayed along with the above general attributes Some of the view able PMI attributes are X Axis Y Axis font color text font name and tolerance type Viewing Attributes TASK 1 To view the attributes of specific model parts select the parts from the model 2 Toviewthe attributes of the entire 3D model make sure that no parts are selected 3 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears 4 Clickthe Attributes tab 5 RESULT The attributes of the selected model parts are displayed in a hierarchical tree 5 Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog Viewing Mass Properties The Mass Properties tab displays the precise measurements for mass volume area center of gravity moments of inertia and inertia tensor for any model or selection TASK 1 Select the part or parts
327. t contain units Measurement Units Lets you specify the default unit to use for measurements Configuring the Base Font for Text Files The Base Font option lets you define the font properties for text files TASK 1 From the Category tree expand General and then select Base Font 2 Select a font from the Font list 3 Select a font size from the Size list 4 Selectthe Bold option Italic option or both options to change the font style ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can see a preview of the text in the Sample area 5 Click OK to apply the font change and close the Configuration dialog RESULT The font changes will only apply to text files 182 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 2D FILES Configuring AutoVue for 2D Files You can configure background color snap and overlay extents settings for 2D files TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears 2 Select 2D in the tree STEP RESULT The 2D options appear Snap Settings In measurement mode when you move the cursor within a predetermined snap radius the snap box appears for the entity to be selected To change the snap radius change the value in the Snap Radius field The snap radius is configured in pixels Overlays Extents Settings When you add overlays AutoVue automatically tries to scale the overlay extents to match the base file extents If you wish t
328. t ain ieee 144 T RIA 144 ret ute REPRE Decius 145 Deleting User Coordinate 146 Modifying a User Defined Coordinate System 146 Activating a Coordinate SYSteM scsscssscssscssesssscssecsssssscssscssecsscessesssecsscessceseesuscssesseecsecesseeseeensess 147 Defining a User Coordinate System cssssssscsecsscssccssecseccssccssssssccsccesesssecsscessecsscescesseessscenceeseeses 148 d iu a Last aha AG naa ep A ato 148 Interference Check Options cccssscsesssssssssssscsssssessncssssssssscsssessssnssassssssecsssssessnsssessnseassaseseesncescensess 149 Performing an Interference Check eee eee eee eee tentent 149 Interference Check Results Options eese eene terrere 150 Comparing 3D Files cca pe iai acia da ivt xe BAR a UE dw IR Wh qid d ug e pa 151 Comparing 3D biles coco bung fA od pr ecoute a roe ple pet RON 152 Comparing Entity eomm e Re 153 Generating a Bill of Material aser Ux GU RO RR dI add Delete ra a Oe 155 Entity Seat CD ie a dca ER DEA esum D T E UE 156 Paerformiligia Search uuo oit ieoa en eri X NO tnb ide rele aene OR Rad 158 Performing d 3D Text Seareli sonos aceti la cep e step TOU Dp o UR RR sise 159 Performing an Attribute based Search
329. t connectivity for the selected entity is highlighted in the workspace 13 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog Performing an Attribute based Search The following steps describe how to perform an attribute based search TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search Q STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears 2 Click the Attributes tab 3 From the Attributes list select an attribute ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To sort the list by Owner Type or Value click the column heading that you want to sort by STEP RESULT The Owner Type and Value of the selected attribute appear in the list 4 Ifyou want to search by owner select an owner from the Owner Filter list If you want to search by value select a value from the Value Filter list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also enter an Owner Filter or Value Filter in the text box 94 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 6 Click Apply Filter s ADDITIONALINFORMATION Select an item in the result list and right click to access options like Zoom Selected and Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear displaying the Owner Type and Value columns 7 Tosavethe results click Export Result STEP REsULT The Save As dialog appears 8 Specify the file name and the directory where you want to store the file
330. tach a note to STEP REsULT The Note applet appears 4 Typethe text that you want in the applet From the File menu select Information STEP RESULT The Note Information dialog appears 6 To change the default font select Font and the type of font Close the Note applet STEP REsULT The note symbol appears on the entity and in the Markup Navigation Tree 8 Right click outside the note area to complete the modification ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit a note double click on the note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Whenever an entity is attached to a 3D model the anchor point the point at which the entity is attached is highlighted by a small square The square is visible only when the anchor point is visible This feature allows you to precisely identify the location of the anchor point and whether the associated entities are visible or hidden 251 Markups NESTING MARKUP ENTITIES Nesting Markup Entities You can add the Attachment or Hyperlink markup entities as a nested child to any markup entity TASK 1 Add a markup entity to a 3D file for example a Text entity 2 From the workspace or Markup Tree select the Text entity 3 From the Markup menu select Attachment or Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment or Hyperlink RESULT In the Markup Tree the selected markup entity appears as a child of the Text parent entity 3D Specific Markups
331. tal tiled pages P Current tile number Y Date Year 96M Date Month 96D Date Day W Date Day of week 96H Time Hour U Time Minute 965 Time seconds r New line NOTE A literal percentage mark is entered manually as 9696 You can also print system variables in watermarks Select a variable from the Insert Vari able list Some Insert Variable options are user name browser and java home Adding a Watermark TASK 1 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Watermark tab Enter the Watermark Text that you want to appear on the file 4 Toinserta code in the watermark select a code from the Insert Code list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example if you select 9on Total document pages the total number of pages for the selected file will appear in the Watermark You can insert more than one code 5 Toinsert a system variable select a variable from the Insert Variable list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example if you select browser version the version of the browser that the file is displayed in will appear in the Watermark ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can insert more than one system variable 6 To set the orientation of the watermark click Diagonal Horizontal or Vertical To change the Font click Set Font The Font dialog appears a From the Font
332. te the Constraint Type Where Coin Coincident Par Parallel Per Perpendicular Con Concentric 133 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PART ALIGNMENT Aligning Model Parts NOTE To see a preview of the alignment before applying the change select the Show Preview check box TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Align Parts ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Align Parts ln Part Alignment Please select the mobile parts to align Constraint Definition Constraint Type Alignment Type Coincident Aligned Parallel Anti Aligned Perpendicular Concentric Geometry m Mobile m Fixed Constraints Anti Alig Show Preview STEP RESULT The Part Alignment dialog appears 2 Select the Constraint Type that you want to perform Select the Alignment Type 4 Select Aligned if you want to align the Mobile point on the model part to the Fixed point on the model 5 Select Anti Aligned if you want to align the Mobile point on the model part so that it is opposite to the Fixed point on the model 6 Select a model part The Mobile arrow is enabled 134 WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL 10 11 12 13 Click Vertex 23 8 or Face to select the type of geometrical point you want to click on the model part to be aligned STEP RESULT All instances of the selected geometrical point appear highl
333. ter a file name 294 CONVERSION PDF 3 From the Convert to Format list select the format you want to convert the file to ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Output and Convert area options change according to the type of format you choose 4 Select the output and convert options that you want to set for the file Click OK RESULT The Conversion in Progress dialog appears The dialog disappears when the file is converted successfully PDF With AutoVue it is possible to convert Office 2D and EDA formats to PDF When converted from Markup Mode markups are added to the contents of the base PDF file When you open the PDF you will see the base file along with all markups X and Y Three factors affect the resolution of an image the type of image you are scanning the output device and the acceptable file size High resolution scans often require large files causing longer processing and print time Note that a high resolution may not produce a better quality printed image if your output device does not recognize the higher resolution information stored in the file To keep file sizes manageable select the lowest resolution that provides acceptable quality on your output device With some file types the Size option appears giving you a choice between millimeters and inches Page sizes can be selected from the Size list or you can customize page sizes by configuring the Initialization file For more information refer
334. th the Align and Scale option you can select to automatically align the files select points to align and scale modify the coordinates XOffset and YOffset or enter a scaling factor for the second file TASK 1 While in Compare mode from the View menu select Align and Scale STEP RESULT The Align and Scale dialog appears 2 Select one of the following options Option Description Automatic AutoVue selects the best fit for the two files Select Points to Align Select snapping points to align to Select Points to Align and Select snapping points to align and scale to Scale Custom You can enter a scale factor as well as X and Y offset values XOffset and YOffset are relative to the base drawing and all options are displayed at their current values 3 Click Apply STEP RESULT The align and scale modifications are applied to the file in the second window 4 Click OK to the close the Align and Scale dialog Drawing Information NOTE This feature is currently not supported with AutoVue Server running on Unix Plat forms 49 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES The Drawing Information option is only available with AutoCAD and MicroStation draw ings and is accessed from the Analysis menu The Drawing Information options available are Select Single Entity List Tags Attributes and Entity Information Viewing Details of a Single Entity The Select Single Entity opti
335. that is opened the toolbar buttons will change For example the following image shows the AutoVue toolbar when a 3D file is open 3 27 zi ee DHA 8 45849 55 Markup Properties Toolbar The Markup Properties toolbar displays below the AutoVue toolbar when you enter Markup mode It includes the available property and formatting options for the markup entities save markups change font fill type line style and many others The following image shows the default Markup Properties toolbar d 2 SH ntitiess B I U Arial 14 oe X Markup Entity Toolbar The Markup Entity toolbar displays by default on the left side of the AutoVue window when you enter Markup mode It includes all the available markup entities for the opened file 21 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Depending on the file that is opened the toolbar buttons will change For example the following image shows the Markup Entity toolbar when a 3D file is open 3 Navigation Panel The Navigation Panel displays by default on the left hand side of the AutoVue workspace when you view a drawing For example when viewing an EDA drawing it allows you to navigate through a list of component instances nets and the associated pins and net nodes pins connected to a net present in the current schematic drawing or Printed Circuit Board PCB design The columns displayed in the Navigat
336. the GUI definition lt TRUE FALSE gt If FALSE the given property value is not removed from the GUI definition This action takes three parameters GUI GUI definition to be modified Prop Property to be removed Value Property value to be removed If no Value is specified then the UI element that represents the given property in the GUI definition is removed For example lt Action name FilterAttrFromGUI Edit CSI_MarkupType m aster default false gt The following is an example of how to define a markup policy in XML The actions are highlighted 307 AUTOVUE MOBILE UPDATING FROM MOBILE PACK lt MarkupPolicy gt lt Action name SaveExistingMarkup default true gt lt ExConditions gt lt OrOperator gt lt AndOperator gt lt AnyMarkupFileCondition Name CSI_MarkupType Value master gt MarkupFileCondition name CSI_MarkupType value consolidated gt MarkupFileCondition name CSI_DocAuthor value CURRENT_USER gt lt AndOperator gt lt NotOperator gt MarkupFileCondition name CSI_DocAuthor value CURRENT_USER gt lt NotOperator gt lt OrOperator gt lt ExConditions gt lt Action gt lt Action name EditMarkup default true gt lt ExConditions gt MarkupFileCondition name Original value true gt lt ExConditions gt lt Action gt lt Action name DeleteMarkup default true gt lt ExConditions gt lt OrOperator gt lt AndOperator gt
337. the light To set the light direction to its default setting select Default Click Close to close the Lighting dialog Adding a New Light Source TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears 2 Select the Two lights option STEP RESULT A new light source appears as a black ball in the 5 o clock position 3 Toadd more light sources right click inside the square surrounding the ball and select Create New Light Source from the pop up menu STEP REsULT The Custom option is selected and the new light source appears as a white ball 4 Clickand drag the small ball until you achieve the desired lighting To restore the light source to its default setting select Default 6 Click Close to close the Lighting dialog RESULT NOTE You can have a total of eight light sources at a time 118 WORKING WITH 3D FILES LIGHT SETTINGS Changing the Light Properties TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears To change the properties of the light such as color or brightness right click directly on the small ball and select Light Properties STEP RESULT The Light Property dialog appears Select a color from the Color menu ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can drag the Brightness and Specularity slide bars to modify the brightness of the source and the br
338. the render speed but the model appears less realistic while in motion Only affects shaded models Tristrip If selected enable disable tristripping of mesh data for display Dynamic Rendering The Dynamic Rendering options let you select the rendering mode for a model in motion The options you can select are 184 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Menu Option Description Fast Frame Model spins or rotates at a fast rate The level of detail is reduced which enables faster rendering when the model is in motion Wire Frame Model is displayed as wire framed during rotation or spinning Flat Shading Smooth shading is not performed on curved surfaces while the model is in motion Wire Polygons Render the model in wire polygon mode while in motion Vertex Cloud Model is displayed as a skeleton of vertices when in motion Bounding Box Model parts are enclosed by bounding boxes when the model is in motion Current Render Mode Model is rendered in the same mode whether moving or static Frame Rate Model Loading The Frame Rate slider lets you define the frame rate for rotating and dynamic zooming on 3D files Drag the slider to specify the frame rate Drag the slider to the left for a lower frame rate and to the right for a higher frame rate A higher frame rate results in a lower resolution The Model configuration options let you control the streami
339. tions available in the Design Stamp dialog To close the Zoom In dialog click Zoom Out To hide an attribute select an attribute from the Attributes box and then select the Hidden check box The hidden attributes will not appear on the Intellistamp however they are viewable from the DMS Attributes dialog 219 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 18 change the font of the attributes click Font a From the Script box you can select Western script or Hebrew script b The font previews in the Sample window c Click OK to implement the font changes ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Repeat to add multiple Intellistamps RESULT To view the available Intellistamps select an Intellistamp from the Stamp Name box the Intellistamp previews in the Preview window Adding an Intellistamp To add an Intellistamp markup entity to a document do the following TASK 1 Enter Markup mode 2 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Intellistamp ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Intellistamp 3 In the workspace click and drag a box to the desired Intellistamp size STEP RESULT The Intellistamp dialog appears 4 From the Choose Stamp box select the desired Intellistamp ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To resize the Intellistamp select Enable Resizing 5 Click OK STEP RESULT The Intellistamp dialog closes and the Intellistamp appears in workspace and in the Markup Ent
340. tity STEP RESULT The Attach File dialog appears 2 Make your changes and click to OK STEP RESULT The dialog closes and modifications are implemented Adding a Hyperlink A hyperlink is a link between the current file and a new file or application You can create hyperlinks in your current file so that your files and applications outside AutoVue are only a click away The main benefit of adding hyperlinks is that the files are accessible from one location but the information is referenced not duplicated This ensures a manageable file size when loading If changes need to be made to a linked file they need to be done in one location the linked file itself Creating a Hyperlink TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Hyperlink 3e 213 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 2 Click a point on the document where you want to place the hyperlink STEP RESULT The Establish Hyperlink dialog appears Establish HyperLink Link Name Description URL Open in anew applet window 3 Enter a Link Name 4 gt Enter a Description optional 5 Type the URL or click Browse to locate the file that you want to link to 6 From the Open In list select where you want the hyperlink to open Open in Description A new applet window Opens the file in another Auto Vue window
341. to close the dialog 109 WORKING WITH 3D FILES CREATING 3D Mockups Selecting Model Parts from the Model Tree TASK 1 2 Click the Models tab Select the part or parts from the Model tree ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting RESULT The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree Hiding Model Parts You can hide specific parts of a model or display specific parts and hide the rest of the model TASK 1 Select the part or parts on the model or from the Model Tree ADDITIONALINFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting SrEP RESULT The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree To hide the selected part or parts right click a selected part on the model or from the Model Tree and select Hide STEP RESULT The selected part or parts are hidden on the model To display the selected part or parts and hide the rest of the model right click a selected part on the model or from the Model Tree and select Hide Rest STEP RESULT The selected parts are displayed in the workspace and the rest of the model is hidden Creating 3D Mockups You can import other 3D Models into the current active file 110 WORKING WITH 3D FILES CREATING 3D Mockups The imported files must be 3D and have similar dimensi
342. to the System Administra tion Guide Technical Drawing Page Sizes ISO Paper Format A8 5 X 11 0 216 mm X 279 mm A4 285 mm X 198 mm 295 CONVERSION CONVERTING A FILE Technical Drawing Page Sizes ISO Paper Format B11 0 X 17 0 279 mm X 432 mm A3 396 mm X 273 mm C17 0 X 22 0 432 mm X 559 mm A2 570 mm X 396 mm D22 0 X 34 0 559 mm X 864 mm Al 817 mm X 570 mm E34 0 X 44 0 864 mm X 1118 mm A0 1165 mm X 817 mm Converting a File TASK From the File menu select Convert ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Input area varies according to the type of file A word processing file displays the file format a raster file displays the file format and size vector and database files display the size file type and dimensions STEP RESULT The Convert dialog appears In the Save As field enter the path and filename or click Browse to locate the directory where you want to save the converted file ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If writing on to an existing file the contents of the output file will be overwritten Specify the conversion options Click OK The file is converted and appears in the specified directory ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can convert several selected pages of a multi page file to a multi page TIFF 296 CONVERSION CHANGING THE PEN SETTINGS Changing the Pen Settings With AutoVue you can specify a thickness for each pen color when doing a conversion This option only appli
343. toVue 2D AutoVue 3D Professional AutoVue EDA AutoVue Electro Mechanical Professional Advanced Professional Professional Leader x Note x x x x x Signoff x x x Stamp x Stamp Library x x x x x 2 0 Markup Entities Arc x x Box x x x Circle x x Cloud x x x Freestyle x x x x Highlight x x x x Line x x Polygon x x x x x Polyline Markup Measurement Entities 2 D Measurement 3 D Measurement x10 EDA Measurement x x 10The 3 0 features in AutoVue EDA Professional are only available when viewing 3 D PCBs 343 APPENDIX B AUTOVUE PRODUCT VARIATIONS FEATURE MATRIX Collaboration Feature AutoVue Office AutoVue 2D AutoVue 3D Professional AutoVue EDA AutoVue Electro Mechanical Professional Advanced Professional Professional Real Time Collaboration AutoVue Mobile Create Mobile Pack x x x x x Markup Mobile Pack x x Update from Mobile Pack x x x x x View Mobile Pack x x This feature requires installation of the AutoVue Mobile product 344 Index Numerics 2D markup entities 225 markups 211 225 measuring 51 non vector angle 56 arc 58 area 55 calibrating distance 54 97 166 231 238 245 257 distance 53 snapping modes 52 235 vector angle 57 arc 58 area 55 calibrating ar
344. tory to which you want to export the list Enter a file name the default name is fverinfo txt 6 Click Save STEP REsULT The list is exported to the specified file 19 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE 7 When you are finished viewing the file version information click Close 8 Click OK to exit the About dialog AutoVue Graphical User Interface This section introduces you to the basics of working with AutoVue s graphical user inter face GUI The following image displays the AutoVue GUI for a 3D drawing File Edit Manipulate Analysis Markup Collaborate Tools Options Window Help Markups va Markup Entity Author Last Modified A Page Layer Z Untitled2 lt ji gt Models Views Bookmarks AutoCad3D dw AutoCAD 2004 2006 118 pg3 3 146220 bytes 2005 07 06 Menu Bar The menu bar is the main access to all the menu commands The selection of commands changes according to the tasks being accomplished by AutoVue 20 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Toolbars AutoVue has three toolbars Auto Vue toolbar Markup Properties toolbar and Markup Entity toolbar AutoVue Toolbar The Auto Vue toolbar displays below the menu bar when you open AutoVue It is the default toolbar and includes the most commonly used functions when viewing a file open a file create a new markup print zoom and many others Depending on the file
345. ts Min Distance Set1 Set the color of the first set point when measuring minimum distance Min Distance Set2 Set the color of the second set point when measuring minimum distance 193 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR GRAPHIC FILES 3D View Option Default Board Color Description Configure the color of the board in 3D view Default Component Color Configure the component color in 3D view Configuring Background Colors for Graphic Files Specify background colors for mono raster files and color raster files TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog that appears 2 Select Graphics in the tree 3 Fromtheir respective Background lists select colors for mono raster files and color raster files Configuring Background Colors for Desktop Office Specify background colors for the following types of Desktop Office files Document Spreadsheet Database 194 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR DESKTOP OFFICE TASK 1 2 3 Archive From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears Select Desktop Office in the tree Select a background color for each Desktop Office file type 195 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR DESKTOP OFFICE 196 Markups AutoVue has the ability to v
346. ts of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the drawing NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel Measure options vary between vector and non vector files For vector files AutoVue provides the option to snap to fixed points on the drawing For non vector files you can only free snap In Markup mode you can choose from several measure options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options Option Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 24 Arc Measure an arc entity From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc 229 Markups 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Option Description Area Measure a selected area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area Distance Measure the distance between two points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points See Changing Measurement Units and Symbols Changing Font TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Markup Entity toolbar
347. u can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Edge Length tab STEP RESULT All edges on the model are highlighted 3 From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the edge length ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you wantto cumulate the measurement of more than one edge select Cumulative 4 Clickthe edge that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The edge length measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 5 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 170 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring Face Surface Use the Surface option to measure the surface area of an entity face or an entire entity on the model TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Surface tab Select Face Surface if you want to measure the surface area of a face on an entity Select Entity Surfaces if you want to measure the surface area of an entire entity wm From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the surface ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to cumulate the measurement of more than one surface click Cumulative 6 Ifyou selected Face Surface move the cursor on the model to highlight a face surface then click the face
348. up Entity toolbar you can also click Area 22 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 3 From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas select Add To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Continue clicking points the drawing to define the area you want measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 9 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 232 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 24 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Measured Angle Units list select t
349. urement dialog Measuring Area Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Area tab 3 Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points on a drawing The snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing the snapping modes are disabled 6 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 7 Fromthe Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter 8 Inthe Net Area Result section of the dialog select Add to cumulate a net area result of different areas 9 Tosubtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract 10 Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result 11 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP REsULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 99 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 12 If you selected Shape click the edge of the predefined shape that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT
350. using snap ping modes 255 Markups 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Snapping Vertex Line Arc Center Plane Mode Entities Vertex Distance The shortest The shortest The shortest between two segment connecting segment connecting segment connecting points the point and the the point and the the point and the line arc plane Line Distance between The line and axis The distance two lines must be parallel between the line and Distance between the plane NOTE The lines must the line and arc axis be parallel NOTE The line must be parallel to the plane Arc Center Distance between Distance between the axes of the arcs the arc axis and the lane NOTE Arc planes P must be parallel NOTE The plane and the arc plane must be perpendicular Plane Distance between the two planes NOTE The planes must be parallel TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Distance lex ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION See 3D Snapping Modes for more information STEP RESULT entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 4 model s
351. vigation Tree To move the text box click and drag it Click and drag the frame handles of the text box to enlarge it ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit the text double click the text box in the tree or in the workspace Hiding the box surrounding the text TASK 1 2 Select the text box entity From the Markup menu select Format and then select Markup Entity Attri butes STEP RESULT The Markup Entity Properties dialog appears 250 MARKUPS ADDING A NOTE From the Text Box Visibility list select OFF 4 ClickOK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To undo repeat steps 1 through 4 except select ON STEP RESULT The dialog closes and the text box is hidden Adding a Note You can attach longer comments as a markup sticky note on the drawing A note displays in the workspace as a standard size graphical symbol lt Each note is labelled as Note lt n gt where n represents the numerical order of occurrence of the note for example the first note is labelled as Note1 To read the note double click the entity to open it or move the mouse over the entity to display the tooltip TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note 2 STEP REsULT The Attach To dialog appears 2 Inthe Attach To dialog click the entity type that you want to attach the note to 3 Select the entity on the model that you want to at
352. w esee tentent tentent ntnnttn tatis stats stata 40 Using the Magnify WINGOW Pet E 40 Working with 2D Vector File Sesinin aia 41 Manipulating 2D Vector Files onion even epis edd o e Ee RTL 41 SEIS CUNO VIBUS 46 VIEW POI aR A N N 46 Analyzing 2D Vector Files 47 Comparing 2D Files sodas nanc n ROMA US AT BER ann AE Hub NOTE 48 Drawing Informatiora seo eco dete ee tn efi iR pa rater Pei s tof Pra C EDU 49 Measurinty in 2D Files o Coa OR eU uci DR en S 51 2D Vector Snapping Modes ura 52 Distance in non Vector Files d usse Fee 53 Distarice onore ta p eU eta ode cO RA EE 53 Calibrating DISTANCE poit usd n dvd p Fe te 54 Area in non Vector 5 55 dn Vector conecto pileo tide ed acted itas ta ecl gl a tac elena aet i 55 Angleinnob Vector Files oss doas esequi ch ee EA 56 Anglen Vect r RR TE REN 57 Arc in noh Vector iles ciclos uec dient epe dte 58 Arcin Vector Files tere eto se durer do edicto e eee S eee 58 Calibrating nidi agr ta sed aeta duorum dca fd 59 Working With EDA Files iacu idv dco arti deperire a ec cannes qa P aa E d p and dar 61 Navigation Panel
353. want to view ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you perform a zoom function in the AutoVue workspace the area displayed in the workspace is highlighted by the frame box in the Pan and Zoom Window 5 From the Pan and Zoom menu select Exit to close the window RESULT The last view performed remains in the AutoVue workspace Using the Magnify Window The Magnify Window option displays the magnified area in a window that updates dynam ically You can click and drag the window to any location on your screen view the details of a select portion of the displayed file while maintaining the display of the full file TASK 1 From the View menu select Magnify Window STEP RESULT The Magnify Window appears 2 Move the cursor to the area that you want to magnify in the current active file 40 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES 3 Clickonce STEP RESULT The area appears magnified in the Magnify Window 4 Right click to exit the Magnify Window Working with 2D Vector Files In addition to all the features that are available for generic 2D files AutoVue provides the ability to access entity information access views saved in the drawing and the ability to intelligent snap when performing measurements AutoVue references various sources to obtain all data required to completely and accu rately display vector files These sources can be internal to the file like layers blocks and overlays or exter
354. when moving the cursor near the center of an elliptical component Pin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a pin Via origin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a via Symbol origin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches the entire component Free snap Allows snapping at any point on the drawing Nets Snap to nets Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ie ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance i STEP REsULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 243 Markups CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 3 Toselectall snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point 6 Click another point on the drawing to define the end point STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active markup Drag to move the measured line path 8 the m
355. wing modifications via the Lighting dialog Set the intensity and source position of the ambient light e Setthe direction of light Add and remove a light source Change light color brightness and specularity Setting Ambient Lighting TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears 2 Click and drag the Ambient Light sliding bar until you achieve the desired lighting STEP RESULT The lighting automatically changes with the movement of the sliding bar The Custom option is selected when you modify the ambient light To set the ambient lighting to its default setting select Default 4 Click Close to close the Lighting dialog 117 WORKING WITH 3D FILES LIGHT SETTINGS Setting Directional Lighting Setting the directional lighting adjusts the position of the light source on the model You can also add a new light source TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears To change the direction of the light click and drag the small ball until you achieve the desired lighting ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also drag the white ball outside of the large ball STEP RESULT The direction of the light reflected on the 3D model automatically changes with the movement of the white ball The Custom option is selected when you adjust the position of
356. wse to a file and click Open STEP RESULT The file is added to the Offline Files list Repeat for any additional files 5 When you are finished adding offline files click OK 328 AUTOVUE IN OFFLINE MODE WORKING IN OFFLINE MODE 6 From the Offline Files dialog click OK to work offline ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If this is your first time working in offline mode the AutoVue installer is automatically launched Follow the on screen instructions to install AutoVue in the preferred location STEP RESULT The Updated offline files dialog appears RESULT AutoVue automatically opens once the offline files have been updated The offline files are created with all associated markups and saved to your local system With AutoVue you can continue working on your files NOTE Since you are in offline mode Work Offline is selected under the File menu See Opening Offline Files for information on opening offline files from AutoVue Opening Offline Files When in offline mode you can continue working on offline files TASK 1 From the File menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open File STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 From the left panel select Offliner STEP RESULT The offline files appear in the dialog An Authentication Information dialog appears of the files are password protected If so enter the login information 3 Select an offline file
357. y ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To set the model to its original transformation click Reset Click Close to close the Transformation dialog STEP RESULT The transformation state remains displayed RESULT To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Trans form and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Sectioning With the Sectioning feature you can view the cross section and cut through of 3D models In the Define Section dialog you can define the section plane position section plane orien tation and the cut through 139 WORKING WITH 3D FILES SECTIONING Section Plane Options In the Define Section dialog you can use the following options to define the orientation of the section plane From 3 Vertices From Face Normal Option Description XY Plane Section plane is oriented along the XY plane YZ Plane Section plane is oriented along the YZ plane XZ Plane Section plane is oriented along the XZ plane Select three vertices on the object to define the orientation of the section plane Select a face on the object to define the orientation of the section plane perpendicular to the face From Edge Tangent Select an edge on the object to define the orientation of the section plane perpendicular to the edges tangent Define a Plane Define X Y and Z coordinates to orient the section plane
358. y Filter option you can choose to display certain entity types while hiding others You can also limit the types of entities you can select in the workspace TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Entity Filter STEP RESULT The Entity Filter dialog appears Under the Visibility column perform one of the following Select the check box beside the entity types you want to display in the workspace Deselect the check box to hide the entity types Under the Selection column perform one of the following Select the check box beside the entity types that you want to be able to select in the workspace Deselect the check box beside the entity types that you do not want to select ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all entity types select the column header check box Deselect the column header check box to deselect all entity types Click Apply to apply the changes Close OK to close the Entity Filter dialog RESULT Only the selected entity types remain displayed in the workspace When you click in the workspace only the entity types checked in the Entity Filter dialog will be highlighted Entity Properties The Entity Properties dialog displays detailed information about any selected entity in the current schematic drawing or PCB design To open the Entity Properties dialog you can 68 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES double click an entity in the workspac
359. y markup entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to modify To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting From the Markup menu select Format and then select Markup Entity Attri butes ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click a markup entity in the Markup Navigation Tree or the workspace select Format and then select Markup Entity Attributes STEP RESULT The Markup Entity Properties dialog appears 273 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Line Color Change the line color the selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 2 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line color From the Line Color list select the color that you want for the entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer 5 changes the entity color to the color of the layer Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog Defining a Custom Line Color To define a custom line color take the following steps TASK 1 From the Line Color list select Custom Color 724 STEP REsULT The Color dialog appears Select a color and click OK Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected markup entities prior to specifying a custom color only the selected entities will have the new line color To apply the new line color to any new markup entity you create make sure no
360. yle and size 7 Click OK to implement the font changes and to close the Font dialog 8 To change the line properties or fill color of the text box select the text box then from the Markup menu select Format and then select the property or properties you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective line property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the line style line thickness fill types and fill colors 9 Right click outside the text area to complete the modification STEP REsULT The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree 10 To move the text box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 11 Toresize the text box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit the text double click the text box in the tree or in the workspace 262 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Adding a Note You can attach longer comments as a markup sticky note on the drawing A note displays in the workspace as a standard size graphical symbol lt Each note is labelled as Note lt n gt where n represents the numerical order of occurrence of the note for example the first note is labelled as Note1 To read the note double click the entity to open it or move the mouse over the entity to display the tooltip TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity to
361. you can also click Distance 3 From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point STEP RESULT The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active markup Move the cursor and click a location on the drawing to display the measure distance STEP REsULT The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in the Measurement Entities dialog To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles You can click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 230 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring Cumulative Distance Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of multi faceted adjoining points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Select Cumulative Click a point on the drawing to defi

Oracle AutoVue 20.0.0 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents